You are on page 1of 233

OPERATING/PROGRAMMING

SUPPLEMENT
for
CINCINNATI
HAWK TURNING CENTER
Model 150 / 200 / 250 (ERD)
with FANUC SERIES 21i
CNC CONTROL

PUBLICATION NO. 91203597B001

IMPORTANT
Carefully read the instructions and safety precautions given in this
manual. Do not attempt to operate this machine until you have thor-
oughly read and understood the material contained in this manual
and all other applicable manuals.
At the time of writing, the book was completely up--to--date. However,
due to continual improvements in design, it is possible that descrip-
tions contained herein may vary to a slight extent from the system de-
livered to you. This merely implies that the system has been improved
to better fulfill your requirements. You are encouraged to contact the
nearest Cincinnati Machine representative for clarification.
Patents Notice
The machine and attachments and parts thereof illustrated and described in
this book are manufactured under and protected by issued and pending
British and Foreign Patents and copyright is reserved in any original design
feature thereof and in the contents of this book and every part thereof.
IMPORTANT

Cincinnati Machine U.K. Limited


P.O. Box 505, Kingsbury Road,
Birmingham, B24 0QU
1998 Cincinnati Machine, a Division of UNOVA Industrial Automation Systems, Inc.
Cincinnati Machine, CINCINNATI, DART, ARROW, SABRE, LANCER and HAWK are
trademarks of Cincinnati Machine, a division of UNOVA Industrial Automation Systems, Inc.

ACRAMATIC is a trademark of Vickers E.S.D., Inc.


Printed in England -- EDITION 1 -- June 1999
FOREWORD

The purpose of this manual is to provide the necessary information to


WARNING 1 enable suitably experienced personnel, to operate the CINCINNATI
In order to clearly show HAWK 150/200/250 Turning Centers equipped with Fanuc 21i control
details of this machine, system.
some covers, shields,
guards, barriers, devices or Information contained in this manual is not warranted and is subject to
doors have either been change without notice.
removed or shown in an
”open” position. All such The manual has not been prepared to enable inexperienced personnel to
protective components operate the machine without further training.
must be installed in posi-
tion before operating this The owner/user is responsible for the training of inexperienced
machine. personnel and for providing the background necessary for experienced
Failure to follow this personnel to safely operate these machines.
instruction may result in
personal injury. It is intended to cover the control of the MTB (Machine Tool Builders)
dependant functions as applicatble to the HAWK TURNING MA-
CHINE with Fanuc control.

It does not include general part programming or control maintenance


information. These are covered in the appropriate GE FANUC
WARNING 2 Operators and maintenance manuals, as supplied with the machine.

CUTTING FLUIDS The chapter on general safety precautions should be observed at all
When soluble coolants are times during machine operation and maintenance. Read this chapter
used, it is important to en- before reading the remaining chapters in this manual and operating the
sure that recommended machine.
concentration levels are
maintained. Any questions pertaining to the operation of the machine should be directed to:

Failure to follow this Field Service Department Cincinnati Machine


instruction can cause corro- Cincinnati Machine U.K. Ltd, Marketing Company,
sion of safety critical parts, P.O. Box 505, Cincinnati,
resulting in machine dam- Kingsbury Road, Ohio 45209--9988,
age and/or serious personal Birmingham, B24 0QU USA.
injury.
England Main Tel: (513) 841--8100
Tel: 0121--351--3821 Service Tel: (513) 841 3000
Fax: 0121--313--1184 Service Fax: (513) 841 8871

DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE
Lethal voltages are present in the magnetics and electrical control cabinets when the MACHINE MAIN DIS-
CONNECT is ’ON’. Current and voltage measurements should be attempted only by qualified electrical main-
tenance personnel.
Before working on any electrical circuits, turn the machine Main Disconnect Device ’OFF’ and lock It.
Capacitors in the Servo Drives require up to 20 minutes to completely discharge. Always verify that discharge
is complete using a known working and calibrated voltmeter before commencing work on these units.
Unless expressly stated in applicable Cincinnati Machine documentation or by the appropriate Cincinnati Ma-
chine Field Service Representative, do NOT work with electrical power ’ON’. If such express statement of
advice exists, working with electrical power ’ON’ should be performed by a Cincinnati Machine Field Service
Representative. The customer and subsequent transferees must determine that any other person performing
work with electrical power ’ON’ is trained and technically qualified.
Failure To Follow This Instruction May Result In Death Or Serious Personal Shock Injury.

--1
Table of Contents

Chapter 1
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
Important . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
General Safety Instructions And Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--2
Personal Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--2
Work Area Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--2
Tool Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3
Lifting And Carrying Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3
Installation And Relocation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--4
Setup And Operation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--4
Maintenance Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--5
Materials Used With This Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
LIFTING DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
EYEBOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
HOIST RINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--9
SPREADER BARS AND LIFTING BEAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--10
CHAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--10
CABLE SLINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--12
SYNTHETIC MATERIAL SLINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--13
P TYPE HOOKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--14
S HOOKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--14
U TYPE HOOKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--16
GENERAL SAFETY LIFTING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--17
Fluids Used With Machine Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18
General Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18
Cutting Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18
Sources Of Information -- USA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--18
Usage Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--19
Cutting Fluids -- Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20
See Cautions 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20
Water Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20
Too Soft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20
Too Hard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20
Cleaning The Coolant Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--20
Lifespan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--21
Tramp Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--21
Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--21
Rust Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--21
Printed Circuit Board Handling Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--22
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--22
Recommended Handling Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--22
Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--23
Perimeter Guarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--23
Operator Sliding Door(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--23
Table of Contents

Feed Hold Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--24


Emergency Stop Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--24
Electrical Isolation Device (Main Disconnect Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--24
Air Supply Isolation Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--24
Metric Lifting Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--24
Machine Related Safety And Usage Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--25
Axis Overtravel Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--25
Safe Operation Of Lathe Chucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--25
Work Holding Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--25
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--26
Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--27
Lithium Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--27
Chapter 2
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
Guard Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--2
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--3
Fumes And Coolant Misting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
Fire Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
Machine Location -- See Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
EMC Directive Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
NC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5
Machine Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5
Axis Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
Hawk Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
Machine And Range Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
Motor Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--25
MACHINE ALIGNMENT AND PROGRAM POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--27
Machine Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--27
Chapter 3
Functional Description of Controls . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
Introduction -- GE FANUC 21i--TA CNC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
OPERATOR PANEL -- PUSHBUTTON DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--2
AUTOMATIC OPERATION -- PROGRAMME SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
MEMORY OPERATION -- (Push button with LED) (A1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
EDIT MODE -- (Push button with LED) (A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
MDI OPERATION -- (Push button with LED) (A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
EXECUTION PUSHBUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
CYCLE START (Push button with LED) (F1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
CYCLE STOP (Push button with LED) (F2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
PROGRAMME STOP (Push button with LED) (F3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--4
SPINDLE CONTROL BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--4
SPINDLE STOP (Push button with LED) (F5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--4
SPINDLE CLOCKWISE (CW) (Push Button with LED) (F4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--4
Table of Contents

SPINDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE (CCW) (Push button with LED) (F6) . . . 3--4
SPINDLE 100% (Push button with LED) (D5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5
SPINDLE SPEED INCREMENT (Push button with LED) (D6) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5
SPINDLE SPEED DECREMENT (Push button with LED) (D4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5
OPERATION BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5
ALIGN MACHINE -- (Push Button with LED) (A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5
MPG MODE (HANDWHEEL) & INCREMENT SELECTION
PUSHBUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5
MPG MODE -- 0.001mm (Push Button with LED) (B4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--5
MPG MODE -- 0.010mm (Push Button with LED) (B5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
MPG MODE -- 0.100mm (Push Button with LED) (B6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
JOG MODE -- (Push Button with LED) (A5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
OPERATION SELECT -- PUSHBUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
SINGLE BLOCK -- (Push Button with LED) (B1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
BLOCK DELETE -- (Push Button with LED) (B2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
OPTIONAL STOP -- (Push Button with LED) (B3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
DRY RUN -- (Push Button with LED) (C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--6
PROGRAMME TEST -- (Push Button with LED) (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
AXES INHIBIT -- (Push Button with LED) (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
AXIS/DIRECTION SELECTION PUSHBUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
X+ AXIS (Push Button with LED) (B9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
X-- AXIS (Push Button with LED) (D9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
Z+ AXIS (Push Button with LED) (C10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
Z-- AXIS (Push Button with LED) (C8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
RAPID TRAVERSE (Push Button with LED) (C9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
PARTS CATCHER DOWN (Push Button with LED) (A6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
PARTS CATCHER UP (Push Button with LED) (A7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
TURRET JOG + (INCREMENT) (Push Button with LED) (C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
TURRET JOG -- (DECREMENT) (Push Button with LED) (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
CHUCK -- ID GRIP (Push Button with LED) (A8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
CHUCK -- OD GRIP (Push Button with LED) (A9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
OFFSET MEASURE (Push Button with LED) (A10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
TOOL SETTING ARM DOWN (Push Button with LED) (D2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
TOOL SETTING ARM UP (Push Button with LED) (D3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
PROGRAM RESTART (Push Button with LED) (D1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
AUX 1 -- Auxillary Push Button (Push Button with LED) (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
COOLANT BUTTONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
COOLANT OFF (Push Button with LED) (F9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
COOLANT ON (Push Button with LED) (F8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
COOLANT AUTO (Push Button with LED) (F10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
MEMORY PROTECTION -- Keyswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
RS 232 SERIAL DATA PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
FEED/RAPID/JOG OVERRIDE -- Selector Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
EMERGENCY STOP (red mushroom pushbutton with latch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
MTB OPERATORS CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
Spindle Load Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
Table of Contents

0 to 100% Range (Continuous rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11


110 to 150% Range -- Yellow Band (30 minutes 50% rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--12
151 to 180% Range -- Red Band (1 minute overload capacity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--12
MASTER START -- Illuminated push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--12
CYCLE START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--12
HANDWHEEL (MPG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
CHUCK UNCLAMP push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
CHUCK CLAMP push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
TAILSTOCK QUILL ADVANCE/STEP ADVANCE push button . . . . . . . . . . . 3--14
TAILSTOCK QUILL RETRACT push button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--14
Machine Pressure -- Tailstock Thrust -- Chuck Drawbar Force -- Chuck Brake (Dampener) Control . .
3--15
MAIN POWER DISCONNECT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--16
Optional Operating Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--17
Swarf Conveyor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--17
Wash Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--18
GENERAL CHUCK SAFETY GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--19
CHUCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--20
CHUCKING SYSTEM TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--20
CHUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--20
CENTRIFUGAL FORCE AND SPEED LIMITATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--20
CHUCK LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--20
TOP JAW RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--21
Chapter 4
Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure . . 4--1
Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
Start Up and Shut Down Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
Machine/Control Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
Turret Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
Drive Tool Machines only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
Chapter 5
Software and Hardware Axis Overtravel . . . . . . 5--1
Software Axis Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
CANCELLING SOFTWARE RANGE CHECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
Hardware Axis Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
Chapter 6
G codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--1
G codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--1
Chapter 7
M codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--1
M codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--1
Table of Contents

M codes supported on Cincinnati Turning Centres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--1


Function Description of M Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2
M00 PROGRAMME STOP (STOPS SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2
M01 OPTIONAL PROGRAMME STOP (STOPS SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2
M02 END OF PROGRAMME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2
M03 START SPINDLE CCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
M04 START SPINDLE CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
M05 SPINDLE STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
M08 FLOOD COOLANT START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
M09 COOLANT OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
M13 START SPINDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE WITH COOLANT . . . . . . 7--3
M14 START SPINDLE CLOCKWISE WITH COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
M19 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
M30 END OF PROGRAM AND REWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
M34 PARTS CATCHER ADVANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
M35 PARTS CATCHER RETRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
M44 RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
M45 RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
M46 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
M47 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
M48 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
M49 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
M50 C--AXIS MODE OFF (Driven Tool Machines only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--5
M51 C--AXIS MODE ON (Driven Tool Machines only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--5
M52 C--AXIS BRAKE ON (In--Position Mode, Driven Tool FeatureDriven tool machines only)
7--5
M53 C--AXIS BRAKE ON-- (Interpolation Mode, Driven Tool Feature)Half pressure -- contour-
ing
(Driven tool machines only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--5
M54 C--AXIS BRAKE OFF (Driven Tool Machines only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6
M61 BARFEED MACRO CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6
M68 ADVANCE TAILSTOCK QUILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6
M69 RETRACT TAILSTOCK QUILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6
M70 TO M73 CUSTOMER OUTPUTS (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6
M74 COLLET CHUCK MODE DISABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M75 COLLET CHUCK MODE ENABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M76 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M77 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M78 CHUCK OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M79 CHUCK CLOSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M80 BARFEED EJECT/RELOAD NEW BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M86 BARFEED PRESSURE ON
(HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M87 BARFEED PRESSURE OFF
(HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M90 BARFEED MODE ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M91 BARFEED MODE OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
M92 BARFEED ROTATION ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
Table of Contents

M93 BARFEED ROTATION OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8


M94 INCREMENT PARTS COUNTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
M98 SUBROUTINE CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
M99 END OF SUBROUTINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
Chapter 8
Spindle Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
Spindle Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
Driven Tool Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
Spindle Jog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--2
Chapter 9
Tooling Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
Tool Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
Turret Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
Driven Tool Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
T Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
Force Turret CW and CCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
Tool Life Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
Chapter 10
Driven Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
C--Axis Mode Enable/Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
C--Axis Initialisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
C--Axis Positioning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
Programming Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--2
C--Axis Interpolation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
Programming Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
Chapter 11
Toolsetter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--1
TSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--1
HPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--2
Macro Probing Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--2
Manual Tool Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--2
Auto Tool Setting -- TSA only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--3
Operator and Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--3
Tool Setting Arm Activation -- TSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--3
M44 TSA Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--3
M45 TSA Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--3
Tool Setting Arm Down Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--4
Tool Setting Arm Up Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--4
HPA -- Manual Toolsetting Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--4
Fitting Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--4
Table of Contents

Removing Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--4


TSA/HPA Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--4
Stylus Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
Stylus Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
Stylus Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
Control Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
Standard Calibration Data -- Base Number 522 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--5
Adjusting the Software Back Off Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--6
Macro Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--6
Tool Nose Vector Hh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--8
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--9
Manual Calibration -- Macro O9011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--9
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--9
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--9
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--9
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--9
Macro Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--9
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--10
Manual Tool Setting -- Macro O9011 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--11
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--11
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--11
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--11
Macro Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--11
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--11
Set a Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--11
Broken Tool Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--12
Auto Tool Setting -- Macro O9012 -- TSA Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--15
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--15
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--15
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--15
Macro Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--15
Chapter 12
Parts Catcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--1
M34 Parts Catcher Advance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--1
M35 Parts Catcher Retract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--1
Parts Catcher Advance Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--2
Parts Catcher Retract Push Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--2
Operator and Programming Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--2
Programming Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--2
Chapter 13
Barfeeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--1
Table of Contents

Bar Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--1


M--Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--1
Standard Barfeed Sequence for Multifeed Unit:-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--2
Standard Barfeed Sequence for Hydrafeed and Feedmaster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--3
Barfeed Spindle Rotation Speed Bits -- Keep Relay K Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13--4
Chapter 14
Reserved Macro Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--1
Used Macro Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14--1
Chapter 15
Connection to Data Input/Output Devices . . . . 15--1
Connection to Data Input and Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15--1
Input/Output Device and Code Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15--2
Chapter 16
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--1
PMC Input Address Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--2
PMC Output Address Reference List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--3
FANUC Operators Panel Connection Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--4
FANUC Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--5
Self--Diagnostic Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--5
Status Display LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--5
Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--5
FANUC Operator Station Key/LED -- Diagnostic Address Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--6
Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--7
Operator Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--73
Table of Contents

Fig. 1
Preferred Inch Lifting Eyebolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--7
Fig. 2
Preferred Metric Lifting Eyebolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
Fig. 3
Eyebolt Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
Fig. 4
Eyebolt I.D. Plates -- Inch and Metric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
Fig. 5
Instruction Plate -- Inch (Part Number 3375984) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
Fig. 6
Instruction Plate -- Metric (Part Number 3375983) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
Fig. 7
Hoist Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--9
Fig. 8
Hoist Ring Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--9
Fig. 9
Spreader Bar -- Typical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--10
Fig. 10
Steel Alloy Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--11
Fig. 11
Wire Rope Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--12
Fig. 12
Sling Load Angle Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--13
Fig. 13
“P” Type Lifting Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--14
Fig. 14
“P” Type Lifting Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--14
Fig. 15
“S” Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--15
Fig. 16
“S” Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--15
Fig. 17
“U” Type Lifting Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--16
Fig. 18
“U” Lifting Hook Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--16
Fig. 19
Safety Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--17
................................................................... 1--26
Fig. 20
Driven Head Tool Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--26
Fig. 21
Hawk Turning Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
Fig. 22
Axis Orientation -- Hawk Turning Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
Fig. 23
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
Fig. 24
Left Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
Fig. 25
Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--11
Fig. 26
Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 200 Machines (VDI Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
Table of Contents

Fig. 27
Turning Capacity Chart -- Hawk 250 Machines (VDI Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--13
Fig. 28
Data Sheets -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--14
Fig. 29
Stroke -- Hawk 200 Machines (VDI Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--15
Fig. 30
Stroke -- Hawk 250 Machines (VDI Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
Fig. 31
Optional Standard Tooling Package -- Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--17
Fig. 32
Optional Standard Tooling Package -- Hawk 200/250 Machines (VDI Tooling) . 2--18
Fig. 33
Work Holding Options -- Hawk 150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--19
Fig. 34
Work Holding Options -- Hawk 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--20
Fig. 35
Work Holding Options -- Hawk 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--21
Fig. 36
Work Holding Options -- Hawk 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--22
Fig. 37
Work Holding Options -- Hawk 250 (Continued| . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--23
Fig. 38
Bar Feed Options -- Hawk 150 machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--24
Fig. 39
Hawk 150 -- Spindle Power Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--25
Fig. 40
Hawk 200 -- Spindle Power Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--25
Fig. 41
Hawk 250 -- Spindle Power Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--26
Fig. 42
Machine Alignment And Program Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--27
Fig. 43
Control Station Layout for:
-- Hawk Turning centres with fanuc 21i TA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
Fig. 44
Operators Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--2
Fig. 45
MTB Operators Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
Fig. 46
Spindle Load Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
Fig. 47
Main Spindle Chuck & Tailstock Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--15
Fig. 48
Chuck Brake Pressure (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--15
Fig. 49
Swarf Conveyor Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--17
Fig. 49
12 Position Turret -- showing Rotation Directions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
Fig. 51
Driven Tool Setup -- Positioning Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--2
Fig. 52
C--Axis Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--2
Table of Contents

Fig. 53
Canned Cycle -- Front Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--3
Fig. 54
Canned Cycle -- Side Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--4
Fig. 55
Driven Tool Setup -- Interpolation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--5
Fig. 56
C--Axis Position Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--6
Fig. 57
Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--7
Fig. 58
Cylindrical Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--8
Fig. 58
Probe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--1
Fig. 59
Probe Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11--2
Fig. 60
Parts Catcher fitted to Operator Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12--1
Fig. 61
Operators Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16--6
Chapter 1
Safety Precautions
Important
WARNING These safety precautions for this CINCINNATI machine have been prepared
Read related safety pre- to assist the operator, programmer and maintenance personnel in practicing
cautions before operating good shop safety procedures.
this machine. Failure to
follow safety instructions Operator and maintenance personnel must read and understand these
may result in serious per- precautions completely before operating, setting up, running, or performing
sonal injury. maintenance on the machine.

These precautions are to be used as a guide to supplement safety precautions


and warnings in the following:

a. All other manuals pertaining to the machine.


WARNING b. Local, plant, and shop safety rules and codes.
In order to clearly show de- c. National safety laws and regulations.
tails of this machine, some
covers, shields, guards,
barriers, devices, or doors
have either been removed
or shown in an ”open”
position. All such protec-
tive components must be
installed in position before
operating this machine.
Failure to follow this
instruction may result in
serious personal injury.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--1


General Safety Instructions And Considerations

Personal Safety

Machine owners, operators, setup men, maintenance, and service personnel


must be aware of the fact that constant day--to--day safety procedures are a
vital part of their job. Accident prevention must be one of the principal
objectives of the job regardless of what activity is involved.

Know and respect your machinery. Read and practice the prescribed safety
WARNING and checking procedures. Make sure that everyone who works for, with, or
near you fully understands and -- more importantly -- complies with the
Failure to follow instruc- following safety precautions and procedures when operating this machine.
tions on this page may re-
sult in serious personal in- Sudden movements, loud noises, horseplay, etc., must be avoided. These
jury. distractions may result in unsafe conditions for those working near the
machinery.

Observe and follow safety instructions such as “NO SMOKING”, “High


Voltage”, “DANGER”, etc., in your working area.

Accidents can occur that result in serious personal injury to yourself or


others due to clothing and other articles becoming entangled in cutters, hand
wheels, levers, or moving machine elements. The following suggestions, if
followed, will help you to avoid such accidents: Neckties, scarfs, gloves
(except as worn for protection when handling sharp edged cutting tools or
rough, sharp or hot parts, see TOOL SAFETY) loose hanging clothing, and
jewelry such as watches, rings, or necklaces must not be worn around
moving machinery. Restrain long hair with a cap or net. Wear gloves only
when handling rough, sharp, or hot parts.

Use safety protective equipment. Wear clean approved eye or face


protection. Safety--toe shoes with slip--proof soles can help you avoid
injury. Keep your protective equipment in good condition.

Never operate or service this equipment if affected by alcohol, drugs or other


substances or conditions which decrease alertness or judgment.

Work Area Safety

Always keep your work area clean. Dirty work areas with such hazards as
oil, debris, or water on the floor may cause someone to fall to the floor, into
the machine, or onto other objects resulting in serious personal injury.

Make sure your work area is free of hazardous obstructions and be aware of
protruding machine members.

Return tools and similar equipment to their proper storage place immediate-
ly after use. Keep work benches neat, orderly, and clean.

Report unsafe working conditions to your supervisor or safety department.


Items such as: worn or broken flooring, ladders, and handrails, unstable or
slippery platforms, or scaffolds must be reported and repaired before use.
Do not use skids, work pieces, stock, machines, tote pans, and boxes as
makeshift climbing aides.

Page 1--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Tool Safety
WARNING
Sharp edged cutting tools must be handled with gloves or a shop cloth.
Failure to follow instruc- Inspect cutting tools before use and reject defective tools.
tions on this page may re-
sult in serious personal in- See WARNING 1.
jury.
Remove hand tooling such as wrenches, measuring equipment, hammers,
and other miscellaneous parts from the machine immediately after usage.

Lifting And Carrying Safety

Contact supervision if you have any questions or are not sure about the
proper procedures for lifting and carrying.
WARNING 1
Before lifting or carrying an object, determine the weight and size by
CUTTING TOOLS referring to such things as tags, shipping data, labels, marked information,
Use adequate hand or manuals.
protection at all times
when handling sharp Use power hoists or other mechanical lifting and carrying equipment for
edged cutting tools. heavy, bulky, or hard to handle objects. Use hookup methods recommended
by your safety department and know the signals for safely directing a crane
Failure to follow this operator.
instruction may result in
serious personal injury. Never place any part of your body under a suspended load or move a
suspended load over any part of another person’s body. Before lifting, be
certain that you have a safe spot for depositing the load. Never work on a
component while it is hanging from a crane or other lifting mechanism.

If in doubt as to the size or type of lifting equipment, method, and procedures


for lifting, contact Cincinnati Machine before proceeding to lift the machine
or its components.

Always inspect slings, chains, hoists, and other lifting devices prior to use.
Do not use lifting devices found to be defective or questionable.

Never exceed the safety rated capacity of cranes, hoists, slings, eyebolts, and
other lifting equipment. Follow, National and local, standards and
instructions applicable to any lifting equipment you use.

Before inserting an eyebolt, be certain that both the eyebolt and the hole
have the same size and type threads. To attain safe working loads, at least
90% of the threaded portion of a standard forged eyebolt must be engaged.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--3


Installation And Relocation Safety

Before lifting the machine, consult the machine manual or Cincinnati


WARNING Machine for proper methods and procedures.

Failure to follow instruc- An electrician must read and understand the electrical schematics prior to
tions on this page may re- connecting the machine to the power source. After connecting the machine,
sult in serious personal in- test all aspects of the electrical system for proper functioning. Always make
jury. sure the machine is grounded properly. Place all selector switches in their
OFF or neutral (disengaged) position. The doors of the main electrical
cabinet must be closed and the main disconnect switch must be in the OFF
position after the power source connection is complete.

Always lock the main disconnect device in the OFF position if the machine
is left unattended, unless machine is part of an unmanned manufacturing
system and in a production cycle.

When the machine is installed, be sure that the motors rotate in the proper
indicated direction.

Setup And Operation Safety

Read and understand all the safety instructions before setting up, operating,
or servicing this machine. Assign only qualified personnel, instructed in
safety and all machine functions, to operate or service this machine.

Operators and maintenance personnel must carefully read, understand, and


fully comply with all machine mounted warning and instruction plates. Do
not paint over, alter, or deface these plates or remove them from the machine.
Replace all plates which become illegible. Replacement plates can be
purchased from Cincinnati Machine.

Safety guards, shields, barriers, covers, and protective devices must be


connected or in place before operating the machine.

All safety features, disengagements, and interlocks must be in place and


functioning correctly prior to operation of this equipment. Never bypass or
wire around any safety device.

When setting up or adjusting a workpiece or fixture, be certain it is a safe


distance away from the cutting tool. Always retract the workpiece a safe
distance from the cutting tool when loading and unloading.

The spindle must be stopped before adjusting the coolant discharge nozzle.

Never brake or slow down moving machinery with your hand or with some
makeshift device. Never use machine power to remove a nut from any shaft.
The spindle and slides must be stopped when measuring work pieces,
changing tools, or removing chips and grit. Remove chips and grit with a
chip rake or brush, not with your hands.

Page 1--4 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Keep all parts of your body off the machine table, table edge, out of the path
of moving units, trip dogs, trip plungers, and out of the “machining area”
during machining operations. Never lean on a machine or reach over or
through a machine -- you can become entangled in tooling and other moving
elements or you may accidentally activate start buttons, feed controls, rapid
traverse controls, power work holding control, or similar devices.
During operation, be attentive to the machining process. Excessive
vibration, unusual sounds, etc., can indicate problems requiring your
immediate attention. Watch for conditions such as packed chips or grit
which can cause breakage of tooling or machine elements.
Shut off power to the machine when leaving the operating area or at the end
of your work period. Never leave the machine running unattended, unless
it has been designed to do so. Turn the master disconnect device to the OFF
position before cleaning the machine at the end of the working day or when
guards or covers are removed that expose hazardous areas.
Maintenance Safety
WARNING See DANGER notice.
Failure to follow instruc- Do not attempt to perform maintenance on this machine until you read and
tions on this page may re-
understand all the safety instructions.
sult in serious personal in-
jury. Assign only qualified service or maintenance personnel trained by
Cincinnati Machine, to perform maintenance and repair work on this
machine. They should consult the service manual before attempting any
service or repair work and when in doubt contact Cincinnati Machine. Use
only Cincinnati Machine replacement parts; others may impair the safety of
the machine. Before performing maintenance or service work, Warning or
Danger signs must be placed conspicuously about the machine. Before
detaching counterweights or driving mechanisms, vertical sliding members
must be blocked properly. See the Service Manual for proper dismantling
procedures.
Before removing or opening any electrical enclosure, cover, plate, or door,
be sure that the Main Disconnect Switch is in the OFF position. If any tool
is required to remove a guard, cover, bracket, or any basic part of this
machine, place the Main Disconnect Switch in the OFF position, lock it in
the OFF position. If possible, post a sign at the disconnect switch indicating
that maintenance is being performed.
Whenever maintenance is to be performed in an area away from the
disconnect and the disconnect is not locked, tag all start button stations with
a “DO NOT START” tag. Adequate precautions, such as locks on circuit
breakers, warning notices, or other equally effective means must be taken
to prevent electrical equipment from being electrically activated when
maintenance work is being performed.
Before attempting to adjust, repair, or perform maintenance on electrical
circuits connected with yellow wires, first find the source of power, turn it
off, and lock it in the OFF position. Machine tool interlock control circuits
connected with yellow wires are powered from a source away from the
machine and carry voltage even when the machine’s main disconnect device
is turned to the OFF position.
When removing electrical equipment, place number or labeled tags on those
wires not marked. If wiring, is replaced, be sure it is of the same type, length,
size, and has the same current carrying capacity.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--5


Close and securely fasten all guards, shields, covers, plates, or doors before
power is reconnected.

An electrical technician must analyze the electrical system to determine the


possible use of power retaining devices such as capacitors. Such power
retaining devices must be disconnected, discharged, or made safe before
maintenance is performed.

Working space around electrical equipment must be clear of obstructions.


WARNING Provide adequate illumination to allow for proper operation and mainte-
nance.
Failure to follow instruc-
tions on this page may re-
sult in serious personal in- DANGER
jury. HIGH VOLTAGE
Lethal voltages are present in the magnetics and electrical
control cabinets when the MACHINE MAIN DISCONNECT is
’ON’. Current and voltage measurements should be at-
tempted only by qualified electrical maintenance person-
nel.
Before working on any electrical circuits, turn the machine
Main Disconnect Device ’OFF’ and lock It.
Capacitors in the Servo Drives require up to 20 minutes to
completely discharge. Always verify that discharge is
complete using a known working and calibrated voltmeter
before commencing work on these units.
Unless expressly stated in applicable Cincinnati Machine
documentation or by the appropriate Cincinnati Machine
Field Service Representative, do NOT work with electrical
power ’ON’. If such express statement of advice exists,
working with electrical power ’ON’ should be performed by
a Cincinnati Machine Field Service Representative. The
customer and subsequent transferees must determine that
any other person performing work with electrical power
’ON’ is trained and technically qualified.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THIS INSTRUCTION MAY RESULT IN
DEATH OR SERIOUS PERSONAL SHOCK INJURY.

Materials Used With This Product

Various materials may be used with this product. Before using/mixing/dilut-


ing materials with this product, contact the manufacturer/authorized
supplier of the material to determine that the material is suitable for the
intended application and request a Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) from
the material manufacturer.

Page 1--6 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


LIFTING DEVICES
NOTE
The information and tables GENERAL
contained in this article re-
The use of lifting devices is subject to certain hazards that cannot be met by
late to Cincinnati Machine
methods and standards. mechanical means but only by the exercise of intelligence, care, and
Consult National, Local and common sense. It is, therefore, essential to have competent and careful
Plant Laws and Regulations operators, physically and mentally fit, thoroughly trained to the safe
regarding lifting practices. operation of the equipment and the handling of the loads. Serious hazards
are overloading, dropping or slipping of the load caused by improper
hitching or slinging, standing or crawling under a load, swinging loads,
obstruction to the free passage of the load, using equipment for a purpose
or a manner for which it was not intended or designed..
WARNING
EYEBOLTS
Before inserting an eye-
bolt, check to be certain A straight lift is preferred when using eyebolts. An angular lift places
that both the eyebolt and additional stresses on an eyebolt, above that of the load to be hoisted.
the hole have the same
size and type threads. For If the situation necessitates an angular lift, the safe working load for angular
example: M12 with M12 or lifts shown in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 should be used.
.375--16 with .375--16.
To attend safe working When multiple eyebolt provisions are designed into a lift, it is recommended
loads, at least 90% of the (in most applications) that a spreader bar be used. (See Fig. 9 which
threaded portion of a illustrates a typical spreader bar arrangement.)
standard forged eyebolt
must be engaged. No greater stress should be allowed than that given under Safe Working
Load in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.
Failure to follow this
instruction may result in To obtain greatest strength from an eyebolt, it must fit reasonably tight in
serious injury. the hole with at least 90% of the threaded length engaged.

Eyebolts should never be welded or subjected to heat in excess of 900F


[480 C].

Eyebolts should never be painted or otherwise coated when used for lifting,
as such coating will very likely cover up flaws.

Eyebolts should be routinely inspected for defects and if any defects are
found, they should be destroyed by melting, crushing, or cutting clear across
the eye.

STRAIGHT SHANK INCH (ANSI/ASME B18.15) 90


60
THREAD .375-- 16 .500-- 13 .625-- 11 1.000-- 8
30
SAFE WORKING LBS. [KG]
LOAD
90 DEGREES 1000 1840 2940 7880
[453] [834] [1333] [3573]
60 DEGREES 375 805 1340 3670
[170] [365] [607] [1664]
30 DEGREES 200 470 805 2390
[90] [213] [365] [1083]

PART NUMBER 3449 870 21312 19489

IDENTIFICATION
PLATE NUMBER 3338325 3338326 3338327 3338328 STRAIGHT SHANK INCH

Fig. 1
Preferred Inch Lifting Eyebolts

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--7


SHOULDER METRIC (ISO 3266-- 1984)
90
THREAD M12 M16 M20 M30
45
SPOT DIAMETER 32 mm 37 mm 42 mm 67 mm
1.25 in. 1.50 in. 1.65 in. 2.63 in.

SAFE WORKING [KILOGRAMS] LBS.


LOAD
90 DEGREES [400] [630] [1000] [2500]
882 1389 2205 5512
45 DEGREES [100] [160] [250] [625]
220 352 551 1378

PART NUMBER 6014453-- 3 6014453-- 4 6014453-- 5 6014453-- 8

IDENTIFICATION SHOULDER METRIC


PLATE NUMBER 3338329 3338330 3338331 3338332

Fig. 2
Preferred Metric Lifting Eyebolts

5 MAX.

NO YES
LOAD LOAD

30 MIN.
3338329
3338325

YES INCH ISO METRIC


NO
.375-- 16 UNC M12

Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Eyebolt Loading Eyebolt I.D. Plates - Inch and Metric

6.00
150

THIS MACHINE HAS BEEN THIS MACHINE HAS BEEN


MANUFACTURED TO UTILIZE MANUFACTURED TO UTILIZE
”INCH” THREAD LIFTING ”METRIC” THREAD LIFTING
3.00
DEVICES. ANY EXCEPTION .25 75 DEVICES. ANY EXCEPTION 6.3
TO THIS WILL BE LABELED TO THIS WILL BE LABELED
ADJACENT TO THE LIFT ADJACENT TO THE LIFT
POINT. POINT.
3375984 3375983

.12 .109 DIA.THRU .08 .12 R 1.4 3R


2
.12 4 PLACES THRU--4
TYP. 3 TYP. 3 TYP.
PLACES
NO 21 (.032) GAGE ALUMINUM.-- NO. AL 5052 ALLOY. ETCHED AREAS TO NO 21 (.032) GAGE ALUMINUM.-- NO. AL 5052 ALLOY. ETCHED AREAS TO BE BLACK
BE BLACK BAKED ENAMEL. ETCHED DEPTH TO BE .003 TO .005 INCHES BAKED ENAMEL. ETCHED DEPTH TO BE .003 to .005 INCHES -- -- -- OR -- -- -- NO. 21 (.032)
-- -- -- OR -- -- -- NO. 21 (.032) GAGE GAGE ALUMINUM
WITH METALPHOTO PROCESS. ALL LETTERING TO BE HELVETICA MEDIUM.
ALUMINUM WITH METALPHOTO PROCESS. ALL LETTERING TO BE HEL- SURFACE GRAIN TO RUN PARALLEL TO LETTERING WITH SATIN FINISH.
VETICA MEDIUM.

Fig. 5 Fig. 6
Instruction Plate - Inch (Part Number 3375984) Instruction Plate - Metric (Part Number 3375983)

Page 1--8 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


HOIST RINGS

Hoist Rings are superior to eyebolts for angular lifting.

Be certain the thread projection is in accordance with the manufacturer’s


recommendation.

Do not recut any damaged threads on hoist rings.

To obtain the safe working load, torque to the recommended values shown
in the table below.
Fig. 7
Hoist Ring Observe all other safety precautions normally practiced on eyebolts.

F F
F F F F F F
THREAD 90 60 45 30 .xxx-- xx
CM HOIST THREAD _ _
TORQUE _ _
RING SIZE W W W W W W W W
PART NO.
MAX. WT MAX. WT MAX. WT MAX. WT CM IDENT.
EACH RING EACH RING EACH RING EACH RING PLATE
PART. NO.
Ft-- Lb N-- m Lb kg Lb kg Lb kg Lb kg
3346225 1 .375-- 16 12.0 16.3 1000 450 866 390 707 318 500 225 5013055 001
3346225 2 .500-- 13 28.0 38 2500 1130 2165 975 1767 795 1250 562 5013055 002
3346225 3 .625-- 11 60.0 81.3 4000 1810 3464 1559 2828 1273 2000 900 5013055 003
3346225 4 1.000-- 8 230.0 312 10000 4500 8660 3897 7071 3182 5000 2250 5013055 004
3346225 6 M12X1.75 27.0 36.6 2204 991 1908 859 1558 701 1102 496 5013055 006
3346225 7 M16X2 59.0 80 3857 1736 3340 1503 2726 1227 1928 868 5013055 007
3346225 8 M20X2.5 100.0 136 4736 2132 4103 1846 3349 1507 2369 1066 5013055 008
3346225 9 M30X3.5 229.0 310 9257 4166 8016 3607 6544 2945 4628 2083 5013055 009

F F F F F F
90 90
THREAD 90
CM HOIST THREAD _ .xxx-- xx
RING SIZE TORQUE W W W W W W
PART NO. MAX. WT MAX. WT MAX. WT
EACH RING EACH RING EACH RING CM IDENT.
PLATE
Ft-- Lb N-- m Lb kg Lb kg Lb kg Ft-- Lb N-- m PART. NO.
3346225 1 .375-- 16 12.0 16.3 1000 450 1000 450 1000 450 5013055 001
3346225 2 .500-- 13 28.0 38 2500 1130 2500 1130 2500 1130 5013055 002
3346225 3 .625-- 11 60.0 81.3 4000 1810 4000 1810 4000 1810 5013055 003
3346225 4 1.000-- 8 230.0 312 10000 4500 10000 4500 10000 4500 5013055 004
3346225 6 M12X1.75 27.0 36 2204 991 2204 991 2204 991 5013055 006
3346225 7 M16X2 59.0 80 3857 1736 3857 1736 3857 1736 5013055 007
3346225 8 M20X2.5 100.0 136 4736 2132 4736 2132 4736 2132 5013055 008
3346225 9 M30X3.5 229.0 310 9257 4166 9257 4166 9257 4166 5013055 009
Fig. 8
Hoist Ring Table NOTE F=FORCE W=WEIGHT

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--9


SPREADER BARS AND LIFTING BEAMS

SPREADER

TO LOAD TO LOAD

Fig. 9
Spreader Bar - Typical

Spreader bars are used when multiple eyebolts are designed into a lift.
Always observe the following safety precautions when using a spreader bar
or lifting beam

Do not exceed the safe working load.

Use the spreader or beam to handle parts or components only for which it
was designed.

Inspect it before each use.

Do not alter or weld anything to bar or beam.

Store properly to avoid damage.

CHAIN

Select a chain with the suitable characteristics and capacity for the load. See
above. Always observe the following safety precautions.

Do not shorten chains with knots, bolts, or any non--approved method.

Never use damaged chain.

Hitch chain securely to the load.

Pad sharp corners with material of sufficient strength to withstand load and
protect chain.

Page 1--10 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


DOUBLE SLING CHAINS TRIPLE SLING CHAINS QUAD SLING CHAINS
TYPE D TYPE T TYPE Q
SINGLE
SIZE OF
CHAIN 60 45 30 60 45 30 60 45 30
CHAIN
90

9/32 in. lbs. 3 250 5 625 4 600 3 250 8 400 6 900 4 875 8400 6900 4 875
.7.2 mm kg. 1 475 2 550 2 085 1 475 3 810 3 130 2 210 3 810 3 130 2 210
3/8 in. lbs. 6 600 11 400 9 300 6 600 17 100 13 950 9 900 17 100 13 950 9 900
9.5 mm kg. 2 995 5 170 4 220 2 995 7 750 6 330 4 490 7750 6 330 4 490
1/2 in. lbs. 11 250 19 700 15 900 11 250 29 250 23 850 16 875 29 250 23 850 16 875
712.7 mm kg. 5 100 8 845 7 210 5 100 13 270 10 820 7650 13 270 10 820 7650
5/8 in. lbs. 16 500 28 600 23 300 16 500 42 900 34 950 24 750 42 900 34 950 24 750
15.9 mm kg. 7 480 12 970 10 570 7 480 19 460 15 850 11 230 19 460 15 850 11 230
3/4 in. lbs. 23 000 39 800 32 500 23 000 59 700 48 750 34 500 59 700 48 700 34 500
19.1 mm kg. 10 430 18 050 14 740 10 430 27 080 22 110 15 650 27 080 22 110 15 650
7/8 in. lbs. 28 750 49 800 40 700 28 750 74 700 61 050 43 125 74 700 61 050 43 125
22.6 mm kg. 13 040 22 590 18 460 13 040 33 880 27 690 19 560 33 880 27 690 19 560
1 in. lbs. 38 750 67 100 54 800 38 750 100 650 82 200 58 125 100 660 82 200 58 125
25.4 mm kg. 17 580 30 440 24 860 17 580 45 650 37 290 26 260 45 650 37 290 26 260
1 1/4 in. lbs. 57 500 99 600 81 300 57 500 149 400 121 950 86 250 149 400 121 950 86 250
31.8 mm kg. 26 080 45 180 36 880 26 080 67 770 55 320 39 120 67 770 55 320 39 120
1 1/2 in. lbs. 80 000 138 500 113 000 80 000
38.1 mm kg. 36 290 62 820 51 260 36 290
1 3/4 in. lbs. 100 000 73 200 41 000 100 000
44.5 mm kg. 45 360 78 560 63 960 45 360
2 in. lbs. 130 000 225 000 183 000 130 000
50.8 mm kg. 26 750 102 060 83 000 26 750

Fig. 10
Steel Alloy Chains

Keep hands and fingers from between the chain and load.

Avoid shock loading -- particularly when working at temperatures below 40


F [4 C].

Never pull chain from under load when load is resting on chain.

Correct kinks and twisting in chain before lifting.

Lift from center of hooks. Avoid lifting from the point.

Assure that load is free to move before lifting. Keep clear of all obstructions.

When using a basket hitch, balance load and assure that chain legs contain
or support load from the sides above the center of gravity.

Store chains in an area where they will not be subject to mechanical damage
or corrosive action.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--11


CABLE SLINGS

Select the appropriate size wire rope and hitch. See Table below.

CABLE ESTIMATED VERTICAL CHOKER BASKET


SIZE RATING CA- HITCH HITCH 60 45 30
PACITY
(For Exact
Rating Check
Sling Tag)

1/4 in. lbs. 980 740 1400 1700 1400 980


6.4 mm kg. 445 335 635 770 635 445
1/2 in. lbs. 3600 2800 5200 6400 5200 3600
712.7 mm kg. 1630 1270 2360 2900 2360 1630
3/4 in. lbs. 7800 5800 11100 13600 11100 7800
19.1 mm kg. 3450 2630 5035 6170 5035 3450
1 in. lbs. 13400 1000 18800 22000 18800 13400
25.4 mm kg. 6080 4540 8530 9980 8530 6080
1 1/4 in. lbs. 19600 14800 28000 34000 28000 19600
31.8 mm kg. 8890 6710 12700 15420 12700 6710
1 1/2 in. lbs. 28000 20000 40000 48000 40000 28000
38.1 mm kg. 12700 9070 18140 21770 18140 12700
1 3/4 in. lbs. 38000 28000 54000 66000 54000 38000
44.5 mm kg. 17240 12700 24490 29940 24490 17240
2 in. lbs. 50000 36000 70000 86000 70000 50000
50.8 mm kg. 22680 16330 31750 39000 31750 22680
Fig. 11
Wire Rope Slings

Guide loads with a tag line when practical.

When using multiple leg sling, select longest one possible.

Examine for damaged or worn area.

Attach securely to load.

Pad sharp corners to protect wire rope.

Center load in the base (bowl) of the hook to prevent hook point loading.

Do not kink, twist, or loop legs.

Keep hands and fingers from between wire rope and load.

Stand clear of attached load.

Start lift slowly to avoid shock injury.

Do not pull wire rope from under a load when the load is resting on it.

Do not shorten sling by knotting, by wire rope clips, or by any other means.

Do not inspect wire rope by passing bare hands over the body. Broken wire,
if present, may puncture the hands.

Keep wire rope well--lubricated to prevent corrosion.

Use gloves at all times when handling.

Page 1--12 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


SYNTHETIC MATERIAL SLINGS

Select the sling with the suitable characteristics and capability for the load
and environment. See Fig. 12.

AS THE SLING TO LOAD ANGLE RATED SLING CAPACITY-- ONE LEG


DECREASES, SO DOES THE RATED CA- USE THIS CHART
PACITY OF A SLING. FOR ALL TYPE If Sling Ca- Then Actual
SLINGS; ROPE, SLING
pacity Sling Capacity
SLING--TO--LOAD ANGLE IS ALWAYS CHAIN, OR NYLON. LIFTING
THE ANGLE BETWEEN THE SLING LEG AND at 90 is... is ...
EFFICIENCY (LB. [KG]) (LB. [KG])
THE HORIZONTAL SURFACE.

1000 1000
90 100.0 %
[454 ] [454 ]

75 1000 968


96.6 % [454 ] [439 ]

60 1000 866


86.6 %
[454 ] [390 ]
SLING
TO LOAD
45 70.7 % 1000 707
ANGLE
[454 ] [320 ]

30 50.0 % 1000 500


[454 ] [225 ]

Fig. 12
Sling Load Angle Chart

When using a choker hitch, the sling shall be long enough to assure that the
choking action is on the webbing.

Slings used in a basket hitch shall have the load balanced.

Do not drag slings over the floor or any abrasive surface.

Do not twist or tie knots in slings.

Never pull sling from load when the load is resting on it.

Protect sling from sharp corners and abrasive surfaces.

Do not drop slings.

Store slings in an area where they will not be subject to mechanical or


chemical damage.

Do not use where acid conditions exist.

Do not use polyester and polypropylene slings where caustic conditions


exist.

Do not use polyester and nylon slings at temperatures in excess of 180


F nor polypropylene slings at temperatures in excess of 200 F.

Do not use aluminum fittings where caustic conditions exist.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--13


P TYPE HOOKS

P type hooks are a proprietary design and should be considered for heavy
(machine and unit) lifts.

Fig. 14 gives dimensional data, safe working loads and screw torque values
for P type hooks.

The use of these hooks must be shown on the assembly drawing, listed in
the Bill of Material and shown in the lifting section of the Service Manual.

D
C

Fig. 13
“P” Type Lifting Hooks

LIFTING SCREW SCREW


PART
CAPACITY A B C D E F SCREW NO. QTY. TORQUE TORQUE
NO.
LBS. [KG] INCH INCH INCH INCH INCH INCH LB./FT. N-- m
402517 1800 [818] 2.00 9.75 4.50 3.00 2.50 --- 2415 2 160 217
296513 2500 [1136] 1.75 10.63 4.00 2.50 4.00 --- 2415 2 160 217
296514 3500 [1590] 2.00 12.25 4.50 3.00 2.50 5.00 2415 3 160 217
402335 5000 [2273] 2.25 12.25 4.50 3.00 5.00 --- 180139 2 370 502
296515 8000 [3636] 2.25 15.75 4.50 3.00 4.00 7.88 180139 3 370 502
WHEN DESIGNING METRIC SIZES SEE THE CURRENT LIFTING MANUAL

Fig. 14
“P” Type Lifting Hooks

S HOOKS

The use of S hooks in conjunction with some of the other lifting devices
dictates additional safety rules which must always be practiced.

Never use more than one S hook in a single chain link or hook.

Inspect the S hook before each use and if damaged destroy by cutting into
two pieces.

Never exceed the safe working load which should be stamped on each hook.

Do not paint, weld, or expose an S hook to high heat.

Page 1--14 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Do not use when either or both S hooks are opened more than 15% of the
normal throat opening or twisted more than 10 from the plane of the
unbent hook.

STAMP TO
INDICATE ALLOY

A
C

R (REF.)
C

STAMP WORKING LOAD LIMIT WITH LOW STRESS


CHARACTERS PER NUCLEAR AMERICAN
SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS CODE STAMP MFGR. NAME OR TRADEMARK FOR
SECTION III, DIV. 1, PARAGRAPH NA--3766.6 (2) IDENTIFICATION

Fig. 15
“S” Hooks

MAX. WORKING ALL DIMENSIONS IN S-- HOOK


LOAD INCHES WEIGHT
MANUFACTURER AND (See Fig 16.)

PART NO. LBS. KG CODE NUMBER A B C R LBS.


3590535--5 650 294 CM Chain 562250 0.500 7.50 2.00 1.00 0.80
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--00800 0.500 5.50 1.50 0.75 0.63
3590535--7 1 015 460 CM Chain 562262 0.625 9.00 2.50 1.25 1.60
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01000 0.625 7.00 1.88 0.94 1.30
3590535--8 1 465 664 CM Chain 562275 0.750 10.50 3.00 1.50 2.60
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01200 0.750 8.25 2.25 1.12 2.10
3590535--9 1 990 902 CM Chain 562287 0.875 12.00 3.50 1.75 4.20
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01400 0.875 9.62 2.62 1.31 3.40
3590535--10 2 600 1179 CM Chain 562300 1.000 13.00 4.00 2.00 6.00
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01600 1.000 11.00 3.00 1.50 5.10
3590535--12 3 290 1492 CM Chain 562310--B 1.125 15.00 4.50 2.25 8.70
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--01800 1.125 12.12 3.38 1.69 7.00
3590535--14 4 065 1843 CM Chain 562325--B 1.250 16.00 5.00 2.50 11.70
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--02000 1.250 13.75 3.75 1.88 10.00
3590535--15 4 915 2229 CM Chain 562337--B 1.375 17.00 5.50 2.75 15.40
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--02200 1.375 14.88 4.12 2.06 13.00
3590535--16 5 850 2653 CM Chain 562350--B 1.500 18.00 6.00 3.00 19.50
Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--02400 1.500 16.50 4.50 2.25 17.50
3590535--18 9 500 4309 Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--02800 1.750 19.25 5.25 2.62 28.00
3590535--20 12 500 5669 Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--03200 2.000 22.00 6.00 6.00 41.00
3590535--25 19 000 8618 Amer. Chain & Cable 5933--04000 2.500 27.50 7.50 9.75 79.00

Fig. 16
“S” Hooks

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--15


U TYPE HOOKS

U type hooks are a proprietary design and should be considered for heavy
(machine and unit) lifts.

Fig. 17 and Fig. 18 give dimensional data, safe working loads and screw
torque values for U type hooks.

The use of these hooks must be shown on the assembly drawing, listed in
the Bill of Material and shown in the lifting section of the Service Manual.

Fig. 17
“U” Type Lifting Hooks

LIFTING SCREW SCREW


PART NO. CAPACITY A B C D TORQUE TORQUE
LB. [KG] in in in in SCREW NO. QTY. LB./FT. N-- m
303427 1 500 [680} 2.75 4.00 2.25 1.25 3248 2 45 61
303429 3 500 [1587] 3.25 4.50 2.50 1.50 2400 2 90 122
301269 6 000 [2720] 4.00 6.00 3.75 2.00 2415 2 160 217
301270 8 000 [3600} 5.00 6.50 3.88 2.25 180139 2 570 502
301271 12 000 [5442] 6.00 8.00 4.50 2.50 308196---3 2 735 997
301272 16 000 [7256] 7.00 9.50 5.30 3.00 308197---4 2 1290 1749
311105 25 000 [11 337] 7.00 14.25 6.00 3.50 308197---4 2 1290 1749
LB. [KG] mm mm mm mm SCREW NO. QTY. N-- m LB./FT.
990819 1 500 [680] 75 107 60 32.0 1234074 2 41 30
3988405 3 000 [1360] 90 120 65 38.0 1234100 2 108 80
3990821 6 000 [2720] 105 155 95 50.0 1400264 2 230 170
5024235 8 000 [3600] 130 180 103 57.2 1400400 2 407 300
5025776 14 000 [6500] 170 250 133 76.2 6010088-- 3 2 1356 1000
5026032 22 500 [10 200] 300/180 380 159 88.9 6010088-- 3 4 1356 1000

Fig. 18
“U” Lifting Hook Table

Page 1--16 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


GENERAL SAFETY LIFTING INFORMATION

All hooks or cranes or any other type lifting device should be equipped with
a safety latch (see Fig. 19) similar to the one manufactured by the
Harrington Co., Plymouth Meeting, Pennsylvania.

Fig. 19
Safety Latch

Illustrations or descriptions of any special lifting devices or techniques


required for servicing components of a specific machine are found in the
section dealing with the particular component.

Always contact the nearest Cincinnati Machine representative if there are


any questions regarding the lifting of any machine components.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--17


Fluids Used With Machine Tools

General Considerations

Various fluid products, such as cutting fluids, lubricants, etc., are used with
this machine tool. The correct type and quantity is identified by instruction
plates on the machine and/or written instructions in the supplied manual(s).

Before using fluids or related products not specifically approved or


recommended with this machine tool, the owner/user should contact the
authorized supplier, closest Cincinnati Machine regional field office for
assistance in determining if the product is suitable for the particular
application.

Lubricants

Only those lubricants (oils and greases) tested and approved by Cincinnati
Machine, should be used in Cincinnati machine tools. For information
concerning latest lubricants manual, contact Cincinnati Machine service
department.

Cutting Fluids
WARNING
Before filling the machine, ensure that the product is suitable for the
CUTTING FLUIDS application. Frequently, check for storage, tank unit or hose leaks.
When soluble coolants
are used, it is important to Water mixed fluids that contain emulsifiers must be protected from freezing.
ensure that recom-
Cutting fluid products should be tailored to each machine tool application
mended concentration
levels are maintained. and workpiece requirement for maximum efficiency. See WARNING.

Failure to follow this In- For assistance in determining the correct cutting fluid, contact nearest
struction can cause cor- Cincinnati Machine Service Department.
rosion of safety critical
parts, resulting in ma- Sources Of Information -- USA
chine damage and/or per-
sonal injury. Before using any fluid product with this machine tool, the owner/user should
request a Technical Data Product Safety Sheet (for example: OSHA Form
20 or a similar technical data information sheet) from the product
manufacturer. This data should include the following:

Fire and Explosion Hazard Chemical and Trade Name


Data Acute Toxicity Properties
Spill or Leak Procedures Hazardous Ingredients
Special Protective Information Physical Data
Special Precautions Recommended Dilutions

Page 1--18 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Listed below are some other sources which can be contacted to obtain
additional up--to--date information concerning the safe use, handling,
storage and disposal of products, materials, chemicals or substances.

Occupational Safety and Health Resource Conservation and


Act (OSHA) Public Law Recovery Act (RCRA) Public Law

Department of Transportation National Institute for


(DOT) Hazard Classification— Occupational Safety and
The Transportation Safety Act Health (NIOSH)

Product Safety Data Sheet Cincinnati Machine


Toxic Substances Control Act P.O. Box 9013
(TSCA) Public Law Cincinnati, Ohio 45209

Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and American National Standards


Rodenticide Act (FIFRA) Public Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
Law

American Conference of
Environmental Protection Agency Governmental Industrial
Hygienists,
Threshold Limit
Federal Hazardous Substances Act Values

Clean Water Act

After receiving the data, analyze and perform the necessary procedures to
assure the safe handling, storage, use and disposal of the product.
Emergency/First Aid procedures and training should be readily available to
personnel handling or using products which may be hazardous (flammable),
harmful (toxic) and/or reactive (unstable)

The owner/user should become familiar with and keep informed on all
regulated materials or substances. Copies of the latest regulated material
may be obtained from agencies, such as NIOSH, Registry of Toxic Effects
for Chemical Substances, U.S. Department of Health Education and
Welfare, Public Health Service, Center for Disease Control, and the
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health.

Usage Information

Products must not be mixed with other products unless permission and/or
instructions have been granted by the manufacturer(s). Product concentrates
must be mixed and diluted exactly as instructed by the manufacturer for a
particular approved application.

All product CAUTION, WARNING and DANGER labels, tags and printed
instructions accompanying the products must be read and followed This
instruction shall remain with the product at all times. Additional product
instruction labels, signs, etc., should be acquired and displayed with
concentrates that are purchased in bulk and then dispensed in small or
diluted quantities

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--19


Cutting Fluids -- Preventative Maintenance

See Cautions 1 and 2

Cutting fluids are designed to cool and lubricate the tool tip while in a cut.
CAUTION 1 There are many types of cutting fluids, some of which may cause various
COOLANTS problems on a machining center tool, such as corrosion, bacteria build--up,
solid formations of chips and cutting debris, etc. if incorrectly applied.
It is not recommended that
neat mineral oils be used as The user should be aware of these potential problems, and guard against
a cutting fluid for this ma- them.
chine.
Failure to heed this warning Two types of cutting fluids can be used on this machine, semi--synthetics,
could seriously impair the ef- and emulsions. Each has its own advantages and disadvantages and the user
ficiency of both the coolant should consider all of them when making a product selection.
and swarf removal systems.
Water Quality

Water is the major ingredient in a water--based cutting fluid. Its importance


in product performance cannot be ignored.

Corrosion, residue, scum, rancidity, foam, excess concentrate use, in fact


almost any cutting fluid performance problem may be caused by the quality
of the water used in making the mix.

Too Soft
CAUTION 2
COOLANTS When the mix water has a total hardness of less that 75ppm, the cutting fluid
may foam -- especially in applications where there is agitation. Foam causes
It is not recommended that problems when it overflows the reservoir, the machining center, the return
coolants having a high de- trenches, etc. Foam may also interfere with settling type separators, obscure
mulsification factor, be used the workpiece, and diminish the cooling capacity of a water--based cutting
with this machine. fluid. Generally, all products foam more readily in soft water.
Such coolants must be
checked for compatability Too Hard
with the oils and greases rec-
ommended for use with this Hard water, when combined with some water--based cutting fluids,
machine. promotes the formation of insoluble soaps. The dissolved minerals in the
water combine with anionic emulsifiers in the cutting fluid concentrate to
Failure to follow this instruc-
form these insoluble compounds that appear as a scum in the mix. Such
tion can lead to lubrication
scum coats the sides of the reservoir, clogs the pipes and filters, covers
problems, resulting in dam-
age to the machine. machining centers with a sticky residue, and may cause sticking gauges,
pushbuttons, selector switches, and other similar devices.

Hard water can promote corrosion of machine components and should


always be eliminated. De--ionized water will help deal with the problem of
hard water, provided advice has been sought.

Cleaning The Coolant Reservoir

The system requires periodic attention and servicing. The reservoir should
be drained and cleaned periodically to remove sediments and prevent
conditions that lead to deterioration of the coolant. The reservoir can be
cleaned by removing the used fluid before adding and circulating a
commercial cleaner or as required by adding a suitable cleaner to the used
coolant in the machining center during a shut--down period while the
machine is cycling. Specific cleaning procedures should be supplied on the
label of each cleaning product.

Page 1--20 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Lifespan

The lifespan of cutting fluids varies widely and depends on many factors.
The basic type of coolant, the hardness of the water, the types of metal in the
coolant tank, the cleanliness of the system, and the amount of tramp oil in
the fluid, all are factors that affect lifespan.

Tramp Oil

Tramp oils need to be controlled. Tramp oils in the coolant mix cause a
varying degree of degradation of the coolant quality.

Minimize the leakage of oils into the system through proper maintenance of
seals and lubricant systems. If excess quantities of oils leak into the system,
the metalworking fluid performance can be reduced. Lubricating and
hydraulic oils contain food for bacteria. They may also blanket the fluid,
excluding air, and thereby provide ideal conditions for the growth of odor
producing bacteria. If allowed to build up, extraneous oil causes smoking
and increases residue around the machining center area.

The elimination of tramp oils is even more important if chemical cutting


fluids are used. Hydraulic oil is a contaminant that must be kept out of the
cutting fluid. Hydraulic oils, and particularly some of the additives
formulated into them, can cause serious damage to the machine tool and
cutting fluid when mixed with water.

If tramp oil build--up should become a problem, various commercial devices


are available to remove it.

Filtering

The cleanliness of the coolant is very important in regards to the reliability


of the various coolant valves, tubing, etc. This Machining Center is
equipped with a coolant filter system. It is good practice to ensure that any
filters are kept in good operating condition.

Rust Prevention

When a machining center tool is sitting idle for a period, the possibility of
corrosion increases. There are certain precautions that the user must take to
prevent damage to the precision ground surfaces on this machine tool.
Under certain conditions, damage can occur within as little time as a day or
two; therefore, it is important that proper precautions be carried out.

If the machining center is going to sit idle for a period, it is important to wipe
all the coolant off the slideways and then protect them with a good
rust--preventive. On the horizontal axes of the machining center, it may be
necessary to run the slides back and forth a number of times, wiping the ways
each time, until no coolant is seen originating from under the slide.

After the coolant is clear from under the slide, spray the rust--preventive on
the ways and move the slide again, taking the rust--preventive back under the
slide.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--21


Printed Circuit Board Handling Instructions
WARNING 1
Do not expose PC Boards to General
electro--static discharge, All integrated circuits are susceptible to electro--static discharge damage.
as intermittent board fail-
Because of this condition, special procedures must be used when handling
ures may occur and cause
erratic machine operation. circuit boards containing integrated circuits, even though there is no
Failure to follow this completely foolproof system of protecting integrated circuits. Metal oxide
instruction may result in semi--conductor (MOS) assemblies manufactured byVickers Electronic
personal injury. Systems Division Incorporated are supplied with a caution sticker. Refer to
the sticker and the information concerning cautions and warnings in the
supplied literature.
WARNING 2
Qualified electrical person- NOTE: It is important to emphasize that electro--static discharge to a PC
nel must disconnect all Board may not completely destroy an assembly component, but
electrical power before severely de--grade this component to a point where intermittent
printed circuit boards are failures may occur.
replaced. Failure to follow
this instruction may result If static discharge occurs at sufficient magnitude (2kV or greater) damage
in personal injury. or degradation will usually occur if recommended handling procedures are
not used. Personnel handling equipment in a low humidity environment can
generate static potentials in excess of 10kV. Do not touch any integrated
WARNING 3 circuit assemblies at the pins, leads or edge connectors, since most damage
Do not set PC Boards in is done at these points. See WARNING 1.
styrofoam, waxed, rubber,
plastic or other high rated Recommended Handling Procedure
non--conductive (dielectric)
materials. Failure to follow Before removing or replacing any PC Board, a qualified technician must
this instruction may result disconnect all electrical power, including battery back--up devices. Refer
in personal injury. to the machine dedicated electrical diagrams. See WARNING 2.
A recommended procedure before handling printed circuit boards is as
follows:
1. Attach a grounded ”wrist strap” in contact with the skin. This strap
should have a resistor value of 1 megohm (1/2 watt) in series with
the person and grounded to leak off electro--static discharge.
2. When working with static control devices (for example: a bag or
pad), touch the device with your grounded hand. This action will
place you and the static control device assembly at the same
electro--static potential.
Store and transport the printed circuit boards in static control bags. Use
”shorting bars” or conductive foam materials. Do not use a suspected static
damaged printed circuit board. See WARNING 3.
Below are examples of electro--static caution symbols which may appear in
areas of concern (for example: packing, shipping or receiving). These
symbols signify that the ”Recommended Handling Procedures” must be
used and/or follow any special supplied instruction.

Page 1--22 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Safety Features

Perimeter Guarding
WARNING 1
A complete set of perimeter guards is supplied and fitted to this machine.
PERIMETER GUARDING See WARNING 1.
It is imperative that this
guarding is kept intact OPERATOR ACCESS TO THE MACHINE is gained at the following
and in place at all times point(s):--
during normal operation
of the machine. 1. Operator Door -- for loading and unloading components and for
setting up purposes.
In such cases where the
part of the guarding has
to be removed for mainte-
nance purposes, the
guarding MUST be re-
placed before the ma-
chine is allowed to go
back into normal opera-
tion.
Failure to follow this
instruction may result in Operator Sliding Door(s)
serious personal injury.
See WARNING 2.

With the door(s) closed and machine power on, a safety switch is actuated
that allows automatic machine movements to be executed.
WARNING 2
OPERATOR DOOR
POWER LOSS It is not possible to open the operator door/s while the machine is in
If machine power is lost automatic cycle, due to the latching mechanism of the switch.
while the door is in its
closed position, it will re- With the door(s) open and machine power on, the following conditions
main latched in that posi- apply:
tion until power is re--ap-
plied. With the door(s) open and machine power on, the following functions are
available under HOLD TO RUN control.
The door can be opened
from the inside using the S Spindle rotation is inhibited.
special key attached to the
underside of the SHOT S Power feed of the X and Z axes are limited to 2m/min maximum.
BOLT body. Do not attempt
to operate the machine with The following functions are also available for selection.
this door open.
1. Coolant Start.
Failure to follow this
instruction may result in 2. Tailstock quill movement.
serious personal injury.
3. Spindle chuck open/close.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--23


Feed Hold Push Button

Provides logical and safe interruption of the active machine cycle when
CAUTION actuated.
Emergency Stop
Emergency Stop Push Button
Actuating this button with the
machine in a cutting cycle See CAUTION.
may damage cutting tools
and work pieces. Provides fastest practical elimination of machine movements (spindle, axes
Failure to follow this instruc- and mechanisms, etc.).
tion may result in damage to
equipment. Electrical Isolation Device (Main Disconnect Switch)

A lockable isolation switch is provided on the main electrical cabinet.


See DANGER.

It should also be noted that it may take up to 20 minutes to discharge


completely the capacitors mounted in the servo drives.
DANGER
Air Supply Isolation Valve
The ELECTRICAL ISOLA-
TION switch does NOT iso- A pneumatic isolation valve is required to be provided by the customer to
late the incoming supply to allow for the removal of air power from the machine.
the electrical cabinet or the
supply to the transformer Metric Lifting Points
unit. Use extreme care when
working near the power in- This machine has been manufactured to utilise “METRIC” thread lifting
put leads. Severe shock inju- devices. Any exception to this will be labelled adjacent to the lift point.
ry can result if the leads are
touched.
Failure to follow this instruc-
tion may result in death or
serious personal injury.

Page 1--24 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Machine Related Safety And Usage Notes
WARNING 1
Axis Overtravel Condition
Failure to follow instruc-
tions on this page may re- Care should be taken when power feeding an axis out of axis overtravel
sult in serious personal in- condition, to ensure that the direction selected brings the axis away from the
jury. overtravel condition. If the wrong direction is selected it is possible to drive
the axis further into overtravel which could result in damage to the machine.

Safe Operation Of Lathe Chucks

Ensure the chuck is of good condition as damage may impede its safe
function especialy at high speeds.

Maximum operating speeds for chucks are for guidance only and attention
should be made to the size and shape of the workpiece and tooling.

The influence of centrifugal force may result in the work piece becoming
insucurely gripped under certain conditions. As the factors vary widely with
each particular application we are unable to provide specific figures for
general use, but the following should be observed;

1. Speed for an application


2. Weight and type of jaws if non--standard

3. Radius at which jaws are operating


4. Condition of chuck

5. State of balance
6. Magnitude of the cutting forces

7. Clamping force applied to the work--piece


When a manual chuck or fixture is used, remove the clamping handle from
the chuck or fixture after tightening and before operating/rotating the
spindle or moving the axes.

Work Holding Devices

Always support the work--piece using the correct work holding device, eg.
chucks, steadrests and centres.

Care should be taken to support work--piece when clamping/unclamping.


WARNING 2
Safe maximum speed of rotation should be observed, as determined by the
Inadequately supported work holding device manufacturer.
bar--stock protruding
from the headstock may Bar stock protruding from the end of the headstock should be adequately
cause whipping. Ensure supported at all times. See Warning 2.
the material is correctly
supported at all times.
Failure to follow this
instruction may result in
serious personal injury.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--25


General Operation
WARNING Loosen tool holder/cutting tool bolts gradually. Keep stable footing and do
Failure to follow instruc- not overtighten these bolts. Check with the manufacture for proper
tions on this page may re- re--torquing values.
sult in serious personal in-
jury. Securely tighten all tool holders, tools chuck jaws. Balancing of these items
may be necessary. Check with the manufacture for proper re--torquing
values.
Always use two spanners to lock cutting tools into a ’Driven Head’ tool
holder. One spanner is located on the rotating spindle unit within the head
whilst the other locates on the spindle locknut, see Fig. 20.

Fig. 20
Driven Head Tool Holder

Never attempt to lock or unlock a tool in a Driven Head when the head is
mounted in a tool station on the turret. See CAUTION.
CAUTION
Always use a bench mounted propriety Tightening Fixture to lock and
Attempting to lock or unlock a
unlock a tool from a Driven Head tool holder. For details, see manufacturers
tool in a Driven Head tool
holder whilst it is mounted in catalogue.
a turret station may cause ex- A tool holder or a plastic blanking plug should be present in each of the turret
cessive torsional strain in the tool stations. Blanking plugs (shown in Figure 32) are recommended to
spindle drive mechanism. occupy turret stations not in use to prevent the ingress swarf and coolant, etc.
Failure to follow this instruc- See manufacturers catalogue.
tion could result in serious
damage to the drive tang on Lower the spindle speed when changing the speed range while the spindle
the Driven Head tool holder is rotating.
and drive mechanism.
Do not insert bar stock into a rotating spindle. The bar stock length should
be shorter than the spindle‘s length.
Bar stock must be straight in order to prevent vibration.
Do not attempt to remove chips if the spindle, turret or any machine
component is in motion.

Page 1--26 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Check that the cycle is complete (Cycle Start indicator is not illuminated)
and the machine is in a Feedhold condition before attempting to unload/load
a workpiece.

Before starting the machine operation (machining), check hydraulic


pressures, lubricating oil pressures, compressed air pressure--if present, and
chuck pressure to make sure all gauges indicate proper values.

Battery Replacement

The battery installed in the control unit will provide backup for the memory
content for approximately 12 months. If an alarm message is displayed on
the screen replace the battery as soon as possible. For the correct battery
replacement procedure refer to the control manufacturers operating manual.

FANUC alarm message “BAT”.

Lithium Batteries
WARNING
Lithium batteries contain the hazardous chemical lithium --an extremely
Improper handling of lith- active chemical requiring special handling and disposal. The following
ium batteries may cause guidelines should be observed when handling lithium batteries:
the batteries to explode,
spraying caustic metal,  Lithium batteries are not rechargeable.
and causing severe
chemical burns.  Do not allow lithium batteries to be heated above 212 degrees F (100
Failure to follow this degrees C).
instruction may result in
serious personal injury.  Do not incinerate lithium batteries.

 Do not expose lithium batteries to water. Water may cause a violent


reaction.

 Do not try to disassemble lithium batteries. Direct contact with the


metal causes severe chemical burns.

Because of the hazardous nature of lithium, disposal must be made


according to applicable federal, state, and local regulations.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 1--27


Chapter 2
System Information

Fig. 21
Hawk Turning Center

Introduction

The CINCINNATI HAWK range of Turning Centers is a general purpose


WARNING cold metal turning machine, which use non--rotating tools with an indexing
turret.
MISUSE OF THE MACHINE
The machine must not be The machine has two sliding axes and tool turret indexing capability all
adapted to carry out any under numerical control.
form of MILLING or GRIND-
ING operations, as its de- The turning center has been designed to automatically index tools in order
sign and construction does to carry out turning, drilling, threading, boring and reaming operations.
not allow for these to be
performed safely. All functions of the machine may be controlled by the NC program, with the
Failure to heed this warning minimum of operator attention being required.
could result in serious per-
sonal injury if not death. The perimeter guarding provided, ensures the safety of personnel against
moving parts, coolant, swarf and broken tooling, when the above operations
are being undertaken. See WARNING. See also GUARD STRENGTH.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--1


Guard Strength

The guards of this machine are designed to prevent access to hazardous


moving parts and to contain the ejection of tool or work--piece fragments up
to a calculated maximum energy level.
WARNING 1
For Hawk 150 machines the maximum energy level is 2480 Joules.
GUARD STRENGTH This is equivalent to a mass of 1.25 kg ejected from the work area and having
For safe use of this an impact speed of 63 m/s.
machine the guards must
be in place and properly For Hawk 200/250 machines the maximum energy level is 8000 Joules.
maintained. Care must be This is equivalent to a mass of 2.5 kg ejected from the work area and
taken to ensure that cut- having an impact speed of 80 m/s.
ters are applied within
their designed safe speed See WARNING 1.
and that any separate
component parts of cut-
ters are securely clamped
prior to application.
Failure to follow this in-
struction may result in se-
rious personal injury.

Page 2--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Noise

Noise level for this machine is within a maximum of 80 dB(A).

The operating conditions used to determine this figure were as follows:

1. Machine correctly installed, clear of all nearby reflecting surfaces with


all guards fitted and closed.

2. Noise Measurement positions 1.6m high at operator’s work--station


and at six equi--spaced positions along a peripheral path 1.0 from the
outer surface of the machine.

3. Noise levels measured using an integrating sound level meter.

4. Machine warmed prior to testing by running for at least 30 minutes at


a spindle speed of 66% of max RPM.

5. A--weighted time--averaged emission sound pressure levels measured


at each position under the following conditions:
5.1 Machine stopped (hydraulics off) to get background pressure
level. Levels recorded in dB(A) using ’slow’ setting.

5.2 Spindle running at maximum speed with chuck jaws gripping a


dummy workpiece. Emission pressure levels, Lpeqθ recorded in
dB(A) using ’slow’ setting.

5.3 Machine performing turning operation as detailed in clause 6.2


below, with time--averaged emission pressure levels being
recorded, Lpeqθ.

6. Operating conditions:

6.1 Mode 1: Running Light Test

Spindle Speed: 5500rpm (Hawk 150)


Workpiece: 34mm diameter (dummy)
Workpiece holding: 3 jaw chuck

6.2 Mode 2: Prescribed Turning Test

Workpiece: EN 302
Workpiece dimensions: 155mm long, 70mm diameter
Workpiece holding: 3 jaw chuck
Tooling type: Indexable insert, sintered carbide,
rhomboidal
Tooling geometry: Nose radius: 0.8 mm; Back rake: +9
Cutting edge angle: 95
Spindle speed: 1000 rpm
Feedrate: 250 mm/min
Depth of cut: 2.0 mm
Metal removal rate: 110 cm3/min
Length of cut: 113 mm
Duration: 27s

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--3


7. All noise emission values corrected for background level.

8. Noise declaration

DECLARED SINGLE--NUMBER NOISE EMISSION VALUES in


WARNING accordance with ISO 4871, LpAd
NOISE LEVEL Maximum A--weighted emission sousnd pressure level LpAd, (ref.
Running the machine at 20←Pa) at the operator’s position or any peripheral position, in decibels:
high speeds with chuck
jaws wide open, could gen- Mode 1: Running light at max. spindle speed: 80
erate noise of a level Mode 2: Under prescribed operating conditions: 77
deemed to be injurious to
the hearing of operators or 9. The operating conditions described herein are considered to be
bystanders. Under such adequately representative of the product, and reflect prevailing usage.
circumstances the use of Noise levels, under different operating conditions, may, however,
hearing protection is re- exceed the limits quoted, and could under extreme conditions
quired. necessitate the use of ear protection equipment. See WARNING.
Failure to heed this warning Fumes And Coolant Misting
could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Extraction equipment can be fitted to the machine. When machining
materials which might produce fumes or result in coolant misting, note
should be taken of local health and safety regulations.

Fire Hazard

The machine has not been designed to cater for materials which, as a result
of the machining application, could combust. It is the owner’s/user’s
responsibility in these circumstances to conform with local safety regula-
tions for handling and machining such materials.

Should further advice be required on any of the above items the request
should be forwarded to one of the offices detailed at the front of this manual.

Machine Location -- See Caution


CAUTION
Avoid locating the machine EMC Directive Requirements
near welding , electrical, or
This machine satisfies the EMC Directive by conforming to generic
magnetic generating equip-
ment. Possible generating emissions and immunity standards for the INDUSTRIAL ENVIRON-
electrical noise may result in MENT ONLY.
machine control interfer-
Install the machine in a clean, well lighted area. Ambient temperatures
ence.
should remain relatively constant to maintain accurate alignment between
Failure to follow this instruc- components, and there should be enough air space around the machine to
tion may result in damage to dissipate heat built up during operation. Avoid particularly a location near
equipment. shipping doors, etc. where air temperatures in winter can fluctuate widely.

Ensure there will be enough room around the machine to access its
components for maintenance and operation. Suitable lifting devices will be
required for assembly, servicing , and loading/unloading of workpieces.

Page 2--4 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


NC Control

The machine operating station is mounted and positioned at the front of the
machine guarding, Protect the control from dust and extremes of
temperature and humidity.

Machine Information
WARNING
The machine and control are integrated to comprise an efficient manufactur-
In order to clearly show ing system. Thus, machining cycles can be completely automatic, including
details of this machine, tool selection, tool positioning, selection of spindle speeds and cutting feeds,
some covers, shields,
coolant control with other related auxiliary functions and/or combinations
doors or guards have ei-
ther been removed or of control. The machine and controls are completely compatible, each
shown in an ’open’ posi- taking advantage of the capabilities of the other.
tion. All such protective
The basic machine consists of the following units:
devices shall be installed
in position before operat- Fixed base
ing this machine. Fixed headstock/spindle
Failure to follow this in- Sliding saddle (Z axis)
struction may result in Sliding turret (X axis)
damage to machine com- Multi--station indexing turret
ponents and/or personal Hydraulic chuck and cylinder
injury Hydraulic tailstock
Computer Numerical Control Station
Electrical Cabinet
Chip/Coolant Tray
Perimeter Guards

Bed/Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The bed/base unit is the main structure of the Turning Center. In addition to
providing rigidity and support for the sliding members, machine alignment
is maintained through the strength of this structure.
The unit houses the following;
Spindle drive motor
Hydraulic tank and pump unit -- bolted to the Left Hand end
of the Bed/Base unit.
Electrical Cabinet

Headstock Spindle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . The headstock spindle unit contains the necessary components to drive the
spindle through range of speeds in one (1) RPM increments. The spindle is
powered by a motor whose speed selection is accomplished via CNC.

Saddle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The sliding saddle provides the Z axis travel.

Turret . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The turret is located on the saddle. The turret provides the X axis travel and
also carries the multi--station indexing turret.

Chip / coolant tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The chip tray is positioned under the base at the front of the machine.

Coolant tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L shaped, lying across the front and Right hand end of the machine. The unit
houses the coolant pump.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--5


Axis Orientation

+X

+C -Z +Z

-X

Fig. 22
Axis Orientation -- Hawk Turning Centre

The axis orientation photograph enables the operator to affix in his mind the
conventional slide directions of movement for the turning center. The
photograph is for axis orientation only and does not represent the
mechanical zero reference points for these axes.

Page 2--6 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Hawk Specification

Units 150 200 250


Chuck
Turn length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max mm 440 540 690
Jaw chuck diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max mm 210 254 304
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max swing over bed mm 400 530 530
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max turn diameter (STD tooling) mm 240 300 350
Bar chuck capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 51 65 77
Axis Travel Ranges
Turret slide (X axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 215 245 270
Saddle (Z axis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 440 540 690
Spindle
AC Drive Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . continuous rated kW 5.5 11 15
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . duty rated kW 7.5 15 18.5
Spindle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . max rpm. 5500 4500 3300
Nose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A2--5 A2--6 A2--8
Bearing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A/C A/C A/C
Bearing size -- Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm. 90 110 130
Linear Axis Feedrates and Thrust
Feedrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z m/min 24
.................................................. X m/min 16
Rapid rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z m/min 24
.................................................. X m/min 16
Axis thrust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z kN 5.6
.................................................. X kN 4.0
Accuracies -- Uni--directional
Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z mm 0.004
.................................................. X mm 0.002
Axis repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Z mm 0.001
.................................................. X mm 0.0005
Tooling
Turret positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 12 12
Index time per station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s 0.2 0.3 0.3
Tooling type (Standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V.D.I.30 V.D.I.40 V.D.I.40
Tailstock
Quill diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 65 95 95
Quill stoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 101 127 127
Quill thrust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 4.5 7.8 7.8
Quill taper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 M.T 5M.T 5M.T

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--7


Hawk Specification Units 150 200 250
CNC System
Model and type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FANUC 21i
Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G.E. FANUC
Number of contouring axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ONE (X Axis)
Lubrication System
Axes ballscrew nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . grease P64
X,Y,Z axis way bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . grease P64
Spindle bearing lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pre--greased sealed
Coolant System
Coolant delivery system -- Low Pressure at 0.9 Bar . . . . . . . . . . l/min 20
Coolant delivery system -- High Pressure at 5.2 Bar . . . . . . . . . . l/min 20
Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m 5
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . without conveyor l 135 177 190
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with conveyor l 155 205 218
Hydraulic System
Oil specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P38
Tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 45
Air Requirement
Air supply pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar 61
Continuous volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ANR dm3/s 5
Electrical Power Requirement
Spindle drive motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kVA 9 25 37
Axis motors X, Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kVA 3 3 3
Turret Indexing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kVA 1.5 1.5 1.5
Hydraulic pump motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kVA 3 3 3
Coolant pump motor -- Low Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VA 650 650 650
Coolant pump motor -- Low Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kVA 3.5 3.5 3.5
Control gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VA 750 750 750
Machine Weight/Floor Space
Machine net weight approx. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg 4000 4500 5000
Overall machine height (max) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m 1.62 1.8 1.8
Machine width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m 1.5 1.9 1.9
Machine length without swarf conveyor m 2.4 3.0 3.46
Machine length with swarf conveyor m 3.2 3.9 4.3
All illustrations and specifications contained in this literature are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication.
The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice in prices, materials, equipment, specifications, and models and to discon-
tinue models. In addition, all dimensions are nominal and can vary with machine model change.

Page 2--8 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Fig. 23
Front View
CNC
CONTROL Z AXIS TRAVEL
STATION
A
AA

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


SWARF
CONVEYOR
25

B DISCHARGE
HEIGHT
QUILL TRAVEL
turning centers.

25
FLOOR LEVEL

O/L LENGTH WITHOUT CONVEYOR


C
Machine And Range Drawings

D
O/L LENGTH WITH CONVEYOR

HAWK 150 200 250


A 440 540 690
B 100 125 125
The Information shown is general in nature. For C 2.4 3.0 3.45
absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine D 3.2 3.9 4.3
E 804 1075 1075

Page 2--9
This section provides machine and range drawings for the Hawk range of
The Information shown is general in nature. For
absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine

’X’ AXIS
TRAVEL
A

HEIGHT OF
B MACHINE

FLOOR

MACHINE WIDTH
C

HAWK 150 200 250


A 215 245 270
B 1.6 1.8 1.8
C 1.5 1.9 1.9

Fig. 24
Left Side View

Page 2--10 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


A PART OFF TOLHOLDER ADJACENT TO A SHORT
A LONG TOOLHOLDER ADJACENT TO A SHORT TOOLHOLDER
TOOLHOLDER (ON EITHER SIDE) PRESENTS VIRTUAL-
(ON EITHER SIDE) PRESENTS VIRTUALLY NO INTERFERENCE
218 R.TOOLING ENVELOPE. 187 R.TOOLING ENVELOPE. LY NO INTERFERENCE EVEN WHEN FACING DOWN TO

Fig. 25
EVEN WHEN FACING DOWN TO THE CENTRE- LINE.
CENTRE. PARTING TOOL IS CLOSER TO DISC THAN
THE TURNING TOOL..

203 MAX.TURNING TO SPEC.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


210 MAX TURNING.
LONG TOOLHOLDER.
(OUTSIDE SPEC.)
MAX.TURNING
BY SPEC

203
203 MAX TURN-
ING BY SPEC. 203

27.4

Turning Capacity Chart - Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling)


270 MAX.TURNED FACE
. (OUTSIDE SPEC.)
323 DISTANCE TO SPINDLE
126. LARGEST DIA. BLANK IN CHUCK WHICH CAN BE
PARTED;
WITH A TURNING TOOLHOLDER IN THE NEXT AD-
JACENT POSITION

210 CHUCK

270 VDI.30,PCD
170 CHUCK
203 THEORETICAL MAX TO SPEC’N

50.8 (2”) MAX. BAR. DRAW TUBE BORE 52MM

30 VDI

340 DISC.

215 ’X’AXIS TOTAL WORKING STROKE

109.5,LARGEST COMPONENT SWING BETWEEN BORING- BARS ON AD-


JACENT TURRET POS’NS. MAX BORING BAR - Ø32
TURNING TOOL- 20 X 20
DISC VDI.30.
202 R.PARTING- TOOL ENVELOPE APPROX.
DISC P.C.D. - 270
BORING BARS OF SIMILAR LENGTH ARE NOT RECOMMENDED TO BE PUT DISC O/DIA - 340
CHUCK STD- Ø170
INTO ADJACENT DISC POSITIONS; BUT SHOULD FOLLOW THE GENERAL
CHUCK SPC’L - Ø210
RULE OF BEING LOADED INTO THE DIAGONALLY OPPOSED STATIONS.
absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
The Information shown is general in nature. For
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine

Page 2--11
Fig. 26
A LONG TOOLHOLDER ADJACENT TO

Page 2--12
A SHORT TOOLHOLDER (ON EITHER
SIDE) PRESENTS VIRTUALLY NO IN-
TERFERENCE EVEN WHEN FACING
Ø306.5 MAX. TURNED FACE
DOWN TO THE CENTRE LINE
(OUTSIDE SPEC)
240 MAX TURNING (LONG TOOLHOLDER)
OUTSIDE SPEC
A PART OFF TOOLHOLDER ADJACENT
254 MAX TURNING BY SPEC R267.7 TOOLING ENVELOPE TO A SHORT TOOLHOLDER (ON EITHER
SIDE) PRESENTS VIRTUALLY NO INTER-
R234.5 TOOLING FERENCE EVEN WHEN FACING DOWN
ENVELOPE TO CENTRE. PARTING TOOL IS CLOSER
TO DISK THAN THE TURNING TOOL

Ø254 MAX. TURNING


BY SPEC.

Ø254 MAX. TURNING


BY SPEC.

Turning Capacity Chart - Hawk 200 Machines (VDI Tooling)


R388 DISTANCE TO
SPINDLE CENTRE LINE
Ø166.5 LARGEST DIA BLANK IN CHUCK
WHICH CAN BE PARTED, WITH A TURNING
TOOL HOLDER IN THE NEXT ADJACENT POCKET

Ø340 P.C.D. Ø254 THEORETICAL MAX.


TO SPECIFICATION

Ø40 VDI

Ø410 DISK
Ø66 DRAWTUBE
BORE

Ø130.5 LARGEST COMPONENT


SWING BETWEEN BORING BARS R262.5 PARTING TOOL
ON ADJACENT TURRET POSITIONS ENVELOPE APPROX.

BORING BARS OF SIMILAR LENGTH


ARE NOT RECOMMENDED TO BE PUT
Ø254 CHUCK
INTO ADJACENT DISK POSITIONS, Ø200 CHUCK 245 ’X’ AXIS TOTAL WORKING STROKE
BUT SHOULD FOLLOW THE GENERAL
RULE OF BEING LOADED INTO THE
DIAGONALLY OPPOSED STATIONS.
absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
The Information shown is general in nature. For

TURNING CAPACITY CHART


Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


A LONG TOOLHOLDER ADJACENT TO A
SHORT TOOLHOLDER (ON EITHER SIDE)

Fig. 27
Ø290.6 MAX TURNING (LONG PRESENTS VITUALLY NO INTERFERENCE
TOOLHLDER) OUTSIDE SPEC EVEN WHEN PARTING DOWN TO THE
CENTRE LINE.
Ø305 MAX. TURNIING BY SPEC.

R264.7 TOOLING Ø356.61 MAX TURNED FACE


R297.7 TOOLING ENVELOPE ENVELOPE (OUTSIDE SPEC)

Ø305 MAX. TURNIING

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


BY SPEC.
40 V.D.I

absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated


The Information shown is general in nature. For
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine
Ø400 P.C.D

Turning Capacity Chart - Hawk 250 Machines (VDI Tooling)


Ø196.5 LARGEST DIA BLANK IN CHUCK
A PART OFF TOOLHOLDER ADJACENT Ø470 DISK
WHICH CAN BE PARTED WITH A TURNING
TO A SHORT TOOLHOLDER (ON EITHER
TOOLHOLDER IN THE NEXT ADJACENT
SIDE) PREENTS VIRTUALLY NO INTER-
POCKET.
FERENCE EVEN WHEN FACING DOWN
TO CENTRE. PARTING TOOL IS CLOSER
TO DISK THAN THE TURNING TOOL.

Ø305 MAX. TURNIING BY


SPEC. R292.5 PART TOOL ENVELOPE

270 ’X’ AXIS TOTAL WORKING Ø78 DRAWTUBE BORE


STROKE.

Ø162.3 LARGEST COMPONENT SWIN


G BETWEEN BORING BARS ON AD-
Ø250 CHUCK.
JACENT TURRET POSITIONS
Ø315 CHUCK.
BORING BARS OF SIMILAR LENGTH
ARE NOT RECOMMENDED TO BE PUT
INTO ADJACENT DISK POSITIONS
BUT SHOULD FOLLOW THE GENERAL
RULE OF BEING LOADED INTO THE DI-
AGONALLY OPPOSED STATIONS. TURNING CAPACITY CHART

Page 2--13
Fig. 28

Page 2--14
8 189 438 56 43 320 SLIDE WIDTH
190
75

32 22 22
52 68

22

63

DUPLOMATIC INDEXER

Data Sheets - Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling)


BSA 150

105

135,RAD. 47
50
25
25 25 22

3 TYP’
PCLNL
2020K12.

30

OVERTRAVEL 8 438 MAX WORKING STROKE


35 35

10

27.4
10 27.4

BULKHEAD
FRONT FACE

HEADSTOCK
FRONT FACE
123 418 STROKE TO HARD JAWS ON KITAGAWA 170 CHUCK
402 STROKE TO HARD JAWS ON S.M.W. 170 CHUCK 8 8 O/TRAVEL
91 454 ABSOLUTE STROKE

KITAGAWA 170--52

215 MAX STROKE

16

101.6 QUILL 173.7 TAILSTOCK


STROKE FULLY BACK

99 101.6 QUILL 173.7 O/HANG 475.8 TAILSTOCK


99
SMW--169. STROKE ADJUSTMENT
139

19 223
The Information shown is general in nature. For

Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.


absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Fig. 29
190 190 65.1
24 100 90

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


83 40

Stroke - Hawk 200 Machines (VDI Tooling)


388 FROM OF DISK TO OF
SPINDLE
The Information shown is general in nature. For

Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.


absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated

267.7 LONG
TOOLHOLDER

HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE


BULKHEAD FRONT FACE
10 O/TRAVEL
104 540 MAX. WORKING STROKE
SMALL SMW 127.00
560 ABSOLUTE STROKE
540 TO KITAGAWA BB08--66 CHUCK FACE QUILL STROKE 177.91
539 TO SMW BHM210--A6 CHUCK FACE 10 O/TRAVEL
245 MAX STROKE

255.6
SMW HARD JAWS
12082121

4 SERRATIONS
103
SMALL KITAGAWA TAILSTOCK
FULLY
665.50 TAILSTOCK TRAVEL BACK
358.6

1250 TO CLEAR ’X’ TRAVEL


57

Page 2--15
Fig. 30

Page 2--16
190
54 190
100 90 64.6

Ø83
Ø40

443 FROM C
L OF DISK TO CL
OF SPINDLE

Stroke - Hawk 250 Machines (VDI Tooling)


297.7 LONG
TOOLHOLDER
10
70 ABSOLUTE STROKE

HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE


O/TRAVEL
690 MAX. WORKING STROKE 32 97.7

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE


119
SMALL 690 TO KATAGAWA B210--A8 CHUCK FACE
The Information shown is general in nature. For

Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.


absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated

SMW
690 TO SMW BBM250--A8 CHUCK FACE 10 O/TRAVEL
179
127.00 177.91
56 QUILL STROKE
270 MAX. STROKE

234.09

27
SMW HARD
JAWS
12082621
4 SERRATIONS

113 SMALL 56
KITAGAWA
173
(347.09) 897 TAILSTOCK TRAVEL

1530.62 TAILSTOCK
FULLY
BACK

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


The Information shown is general in nature. For
absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.

40
22

B1;30/20:212--100--150.
RECTANGULAR TRANSVERSE
TOOLHOLDER,R.H.SHORT. 35TYP’.

25
35

27.4,TYP’.

47
20
B3;30/20:212--105--150. SQ.
RECTANGULAR TRANSVERSE
INVERTED TOOLHOLDER,
RIGHT--HAND;SHORT.

B7;30/20:222--105--150.
RECTANGULAR TRANSVERSE
INVERSE TOOLHOLDER,
RIGHT--HAND:LONG.

55
65
82.4

190MAX.-- IF USING FULL STROKE.


71
59

E1;30/25:222--052--150
TOOLHOLDER WITH:--
INTERNAL COOLANT SUPPLY.
17

45.

68. 25 22
E1;30/32:222--055--150 H6
TOOLHOLDER WITH:--
INTERNAL COOLANT SUPPLY.
68 52. 32H6.

61 63
75
30. E2;30/30:212--015--156
BORING BAR HOLDER. 61

10H6. 12H6. 16H6. 20H6. 25H6.

ONE SET OF FIVE LINER BUSHES. 68.


75
30H6.

OPTIONAL STANDARD
TOOLING PACKAGE.
001270504000001.

Fig. 31
Optional Standard Tooling Package - Hawk 150 (VDI Tooling)

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--17


BORING BAR HOLDER -- VDI 40 Dia 40
FORM E1

Fig. 32
27.4032
DIN 69880 Ø74 Ø52 Ø32
DRILL HOLDER -- VDI 40 Dia 32
(WITH INTERNAL COOLAND SUPPLY)

Page 2--18
FORM E1
Ø83 Ø40 27.4032
DIN 69880
22
75

76
90
COLLET CHUCK -- VDI 40 ER32 TYPE
FORM E4
30.4032
DIN 69880 PARTING O FF BLADE HOLDER -- VSI 40 --
RIGHT HAND
32.SH32
32.4032
The Information shown is general in nature. For

Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.


absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated

ONE SET OF FOUR LINER BUSHES

TURNING TOOL -- VDI 40 -- RIGHT HAND LONG


FORM B5
BORING BAR SLEEVE BORING BAR SLEEVE BORING BAR SLEEVE BORING BAR SLEEVE 11.4025/20
Ø12 Ø16 Ø20 Ø25 DIN 69880 PART 3
28.4012 28.4016 28.4020 28.4025

Optional Standard Tooling Package - Hawk 200/250 Machines (VDI Tooling)


OPTIONAL STANDARD TOOLING
Ø40
PACKAGE 1946177
78
Ø16 H6 Ø20 H6 Ø25 H6
Ø12 H6

TURNING TOOL -- VDI 40 -- RIGHT HAND SHORT OVERHEAD


FORM B3
6.4025/20
DIN 69880 PART 3

PLASTIC PLUG -- VDI 40


FORM Z2
29.40K
DIN 69880

TURNING TOOL -- VDI 40 -- RIGHT HAND SHORT


FORM B1
5.4025/20
DIN 69880

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Fig. 33
139 156.9
139 156.9
160
150
99
99 24

24 4 21
24
24 20 20 24 4 21
24
10.5
10.5 SMW.KSZ,MB60.

OF JAW
10 SMW.HARD JAW

SERRATIONS.
10 12081621.CM#:-- COLLET CHUCK.
SMW.210,BHD.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


1270485000001
22
SMW - 170-- 52
SMW.HARD JAW
21 1282030.CM#:--
23
21 82 1270486000001
20 45
37
67
45 67

Work Holding Options - Hawk 150


M10
23
20
C’BORE
C’BORE
FOR M12.
FOR M10.
19

ings supplied with the machine.


49,MIN. 49 MIN
72,MAX.
46.5,MIN.
46.5 MIN
63.5,MAX.
72 MAX
52. 14 210
52 63.5 MAX Ø210 Ø52 52. 45
45
60. 130. 185.
Ø60 Ø130 Ø185

Ø170170.

M12 M12

108.9
108.9
92
98 138.9
138.9
111
111

The Information shown is general in nature. For absolute


working dimensions refer to Dedicated Engineering Draw-
156
156
123 165
123 24 24 HARD JAWS 165
22
HB,08A1.CM#:--
91 12 22 1270575000001
91 12 HARD JAWS 12 12
HB,06B1.CM#:-- 22 22 KITAGAWA CRL60.
15
15 1270572000001 COLLET CHUCK.
KITAGAWA B208,A5.

KITAGAWA 170--52
13 25

20

C’BORE 67.5 25
M10 67.5 M10
FOR M10.

20 C’BORE
FOR M10.
18

8.5 45.5 ,MIN.

68.7,MAX.

52.
45.5 MIN
3.7 STROKE
13.75
Ø52 PER JAW.
68.7 MAX 190.
60. 138.
Ø60 Ø138 Ø150
Ø52 52. 48,MIN.
60,MAX.

170.
Ø170
M10

210
Ø20
M10

91 148
91 148
3
108
108

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE


HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE.
50
50

Page 2--19
KITAGAWA CHUCKING SYSTEM

The Information shown is general in nature. For


absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.

Ø165
CRS66--A6

Ø150
Ø65

140
17

21
57

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE

HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE

3
Ø75 254
B210--A6

100

120
25

21
57

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE

HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE


3
Ø66 Ø200
BB08--66

86

103
17

21
57

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE

HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE


3

Fig. 34
Work Holding Options - Hawk 200

Page 2--20 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


The Information shown is general in nature. For
absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.
SMW CHUCKING SYSTEM

Ø250
Ø75
BHM--250--A6

105

124
24

21
57

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE


HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE

3
Ø210
Ø66
BBM--210--A6

92

104
17

21
57

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE


HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE
3

Fig. 35
Work Holding Options - Hawk 200

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--21


The Information shown is general in nature. For
absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.
KITAGAWA CHUCKING SYSTEM

220


200
STROKE
11mm

30
CDC80A2 (1273393)

170
159
20

71
77

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE ❤

HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE

3
91 304
B212--A8

110
122
18

71
77

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE

HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE


3
75 254

100
B210--A8

113
18
77

71

BULKHEAD FRONT FACE

HEADSTOCK FRONT FACE


3

Fig. 36
Work Holding Options - Hawk 250

Page 2--22 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


The Information shown is general in nature. For
absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine.
SMW CHUCKING SYSTEM

315
95
BHM 315--AB

111
136
30
77

BULKHEAD -- FRONT FACE 71

HEADSTOCK -- FRONT FACE


3
77 250
BBM 250--A8

105
119
19
77

71

BULKHEAD -- FRONT FACE

HEADSTOCK -- FRONT FACE


3

Fig. 37
Work Holding Options - Hawk 250 (Continued|

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--23


CLEARANCE REQUIRED
5500 MIN BEHIND MACHINE
450
1520 APPROX 3210 APPROX
APPROX

350
APPROX

5180

3000 BAR CAPACITY

CLEARANCE REQUIRED
4900 MIN BEHIND MACHINE
2700 720

4800 OVERALL LENGTH 1150 REF

3000 BAR CAPACITY

1770
1064
BASE MULTIFEED 3 -- 76
SHORT MAGAZINE BAR
FEED OPTION

1150
PLAN VIEW OF BASE
1975
1670 BASE

BAR FEED SHOWN


ROTATED THROUGH
90° AND 135°

The Information shown is general in nature. For


absolute working dimensions refer to Dedicated
91203090A
Engineering Drawings supplied with the machine

Fig. 38
Bar Feed Options - Hawk 150 machines

Page 2--24 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Motor Rating

The MTD (Machine Tool Duty) rating of the motor is based upon the
amount of power delivered in a given amount of time. The following chart
shows spindle motor MTD ratings.

Machine MTD Rating Continuous Use


Hawk Model 150 7.5 5.5
Hawk Model 200 15 11
Hawk Model 250 18.5 15

7.5 kW
MTDR
5.5 kW
5.0 kW
POWER

4.5 kW
Continuous

30 750 3,500 5,500


SPEED RPM

Fig. 39
Hawk 150 - Spindle Power Characteristics

15 kW
MTDR

11 kW
Continuous
POWER

30 750 4,500
SPEED RPM
Fig. 40
Hawk 200 - Spindle Power Characteristics

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--25


15 kW
MTDR

11 kW
Continuous
POWER

30 575 3,300
SPEED RPM

Fig. 41
Hawk 250 - Spindle Power Characteristics

Page 2--26 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


MACHINE ALIGNMENT AND PROGRAM POINTS
On Turning Centers, the Z axis travels parallel to the spindle centerline and
the X axis travels perpendicular to the spindle centerline.

Several real and imaginary points are used to describe the relationship
between the machine elements, the tool point, and the workpiece. There are
many references to these points throughout the manual. This section defines
the machine setup and alignment points. Refer to Machine Range drawings.

X+

Z+

SPINDLE
FACE

Z*

CHUCK
X*
OD COMMON
TOOL POINT
SPINDLE AT GRID ALIGN
CENTERLINE POSITION

MACHINE ZERO

Fig. 42
Machine Alignment And Program Points

Machine Zero

Machine zero in the X axis is located on the spindle centerline.

Machine zero is established only once each time the machine is started and
aligned. The control calculates all automatic range checking and interfer-
ence parameters from machine zero.

NOTE: When coordinate reset is active and the machine is aligned, pro-
gram zero is also located at this point.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 2--27


Chapter 3
Functional Description of Controls
Introduction -- GE FANUC 21i--TA CNC System

The GE Fanuc 21i--TA CNC system control consist of a Control mounted


behind flat screen with soft keys, MDI keypad, Operators Control Panel, and
an MTB panel (Machine Tool Builders panel).

For full description on using the PCMIA slot and softkeys on the control/flat
screen unit and also the MDI keypad unit reference should be made to GE
Fanuc Operators manual (21i--TA B--63084EN) supplied with this machine.

The Hawk Turning centre is arranged with GE Fanuc 21i--TA Computer


Numerical Control System comprising an operator control station with a
9.5” high resolution monochrome flatscreen display. See Fig. 43.

Control/Flat Screen/Softkeys MDI Keypad

PC MIA
Slot
(SRAM)
Card

x
F
-- -- +
31
X
+X

--Z +Z
Operators
--
0
+ --X Control
MTB Panel

RS 232 Serial Data Port

Fig. 43
Control Station Layout for:
- Hawk Turning centres with fanuc 21i TA

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--1


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A x +
X A1
-- + X
-+X-
B
Z 1
X1 X10
U
X100

C
AUX
1
--Z X +Z

X
--X
D -- 100% +
RS 232

Fig. 44
Operators Control Panel

OPERATOR PANEL -- PUSHBUTTON DESCRIPTIONS


REF DESCRIPTION REF DESCRIPTION
A1 Memory Operation C5 Turret Jog -- (decrement)
A2 EDIT mode C6 AUX 1 -- spare membrane key
A3 MDI Operation C8 --Z axis JOG/MPG axis selection
A4 Align Machine C9 Rapid traverse
A5 Jog mode C10 +Z axis JOG/MPG axis selection
A6 Parts catcher down D1 Program restart
A7 Parts catcher up D2 Tool Setting Arm Down (active)
A8 Chuck -- ID Grip D3 Tool Setting Arm Up (stowed)
A9 Chuck -- OD Grip D4 Spindle speed decrement
A10 Offset measure D5 Spindle 100%
B1 Single block D6 Spindle speed increment
B2 Block delete D8
B3 Optional stop D9 --X axis JOG/MPG axis selection
B4 MPG mode x 1 D10
B5 MPG mode x 10 F1 Cycle start
B6 MPG mode x 100 F2 Cycle stop
B8 F3 Program stop
B9 +X axis JOG/MPG axis selection F4 Spindle clockwise (CW)
B10 F5 Spindle stop
C1 Dry run F6 Spindle counterclockwise (CCW)
C2 Program test F8 Coolant On
C3 Axes inhibit F9 Coolant Off
C4 Turret Jog + (increment) F10 Coolant Auto

Page 3--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


AUTOMATIC OPERATION - PROGRAMME SOURCE

MEMORY OPERATION -- (Push button with LED) (A1)

This mode is selected to run a part programme registered in the active


programme memory. (See GE Fanuc Operators Manual -- III Operation
chapters 1.2 and 4.1).

EDIT MODE -- (Push button with LED) (A2)

This mode is selected to edit part programmes registered in the active


programme memory. (See GE Fanuc Operators Manual -- III Operation
chapters 9).

MDI OPERATION -- (Push button with LED) (A3)

This mode selection enables a programme of up to 10 blocks to be created


and processed from the MDI buffer memory. (See GE Fanuc Operators
Manual -- III Operation chapters 1.2 and 4.2).

EXECUTION PUSHBUTTONS

CYCLE START (Push button with LED) (F1)

This push button causes the active NC programme to start, providing that
the following conditions are met:--

1) All axes have been aligned.

2) The turret is aligned, i.e. ALIGN MACHINE key is


illuminated
3) No NC or Machine faults are active

4) AUTO or MDI mode has been selected

5) Operator door/s is/are closed

CYCLE STOP (Push button with LED) (F2)

Cycle stop is used to stop all feed motors and to suspend the NC cycle.

The LED in this button is illuminated whenever the CYCLE STOP is active.
It is cancelled when restarting the NC cycle using the CYCLE START push
button.

NOTE: Any active programme dwell will also be stopped by using this
push button. If CYCLE STOP is depressed during a Tapping
Cycle the NC cycle will continue until the spindle has reversed
and the axis retracted.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--3


PROGRAMME STOP (Push button with LED) (F3)

Pressing this push button during NC part programmed execution causes the
active cycle to be held at the end of the current programme block. To restart
the active part programme, the CYCLE START push button must be
depressed.

It is permitted to stop the spindle whilst in a programme stop condition. The


NC cycle however cannot be resumed until the spindle has been restarted.

PROGRAMME STOP push button is active in both AUTO & MDI modes
but only whilst the machine is in cycle.

The LED in this push button is illuminated when programme stop is active
and remains illuminated until the cycle is restarted or the control system is
reset.

SPINDLE CONTROL BUTTONS

SPINDLE STOP (Push button with LED) (F5)

This push button causes an immediate spindle stop and is active at all times.

If the machine is in cycle, a cycle stop is also generated.

The LED in this button is illuminated if the spindle is stopped during an


Auto Cycle interrupt condition and acts as a reminder that the spindle must
be restarted before the cycle can be resumed.

SPINDLE CLOCKWISE (CW) (Push Button with LED) (F4)

This push button can be used to restart the spindle, once it has been stopped
during an Auto Cycle Interrupt.

In C--Axis Mode OFF (M50 active), this button can also be used to jog the
spindle in the clockwise direction providing the control is not in cycle or in
a cycle interrupt condition, and only when the operator door is closed. See
CAUTION.

In C--Axis Mode ON (M51 active), this button, in conjunction with the


control set in JOG mode, can be used to jog the spindle in the clockwise
direction. The operator door is latched shut at all times when M51 is the
active M--code. See CAUTION. Also, see HANDWHEEL (MPG) for
alternative spindle jog facility.

SPINDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE (CCW) (Push button with


LED) (F6)

This push button can be used to restart the spindle, once it has been stopped
during an Auto Cycle interrupt.

In C--Axis Mode OFF (M50 active), this button can also be used to jog the
spindle in the CCW direction providing the control is not in cycle or in a
cycle interrupt condition, and only when the operator door is closed. See
CAUTION.

In C--Axis Mode ON (M51 active), this button, in conjunction with the


control set in JOG mode, can be used to jog the spindle in the CCW
direction. The operator door is latched shut at all times when M51 is the

Page 3--4 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


active M--code. See CAUTION. Also, see HANDWHEEL (MPG) for
alternative spindle jog facility.

CAUTION
Spindle Jog
The Spindle/Chuck must be in an interference free position
before pressing the SPINDLE CW/CCW pushbutton.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in damage to
the machine, workpiece and tooling.

SPINDLE 100% (Push button with LED) (D5)

100% This push button is used to return the actual spindle speed to 100% of the
last programmed value and to remove any active spindle speed override
imposed by means of the spindle speed increment and decrement buttons.
The LED in this push button is illuminated all the time that the 100% spindle
speed override is active

SPINDLE SPEED INCREMENT (Push button with LED) (D6)

+ This push button is used to override the programmed spindle speed. The
actual spindle speed is increase by 10% each time this button is depressed,
up to a maximum of 120% of the programmed value or the the maximum
spindle speed if this occurs sooner.

The LED in this push button is illuminated once the 120% override is active.

NOTE: Spindle override is ignored whilst M48 is active

SPINDLE SPEED DECREMENT (Push button with LED) (D4)

-- This push button is used to override the programmed spindle speed. The
actual spindle speed is decreased by 10% each time this button is depressed,
down to a minimum of 50% of the programmed value or the the minimum
spindle speed if this occurs sooner.

The LED in this push button is illuminated once the 50% override is active.

NOTE: Spindle override is ignored whilst M48 is active

OPERATION BUTTONS

ALIGN MACHINE -- (Push Button with LED) (A4)

This pushbutton is used for referencing the machine axes and turret to the
control system. (See chapter 4 of this manual for machine and mechanism
alignment procedure).

MPG MODE (HANDWHEEL) & INCREMENT SELECTION


PUSHBUTTONS

MPG MODE -- 0.001mm (Push Button with LED) (B4)

This pushbutton selects MPG Mode with 0.001mm distance move per
X1
increment of the handwheel.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--5


MPG MODE -- 0.010mm (Push Button with LED) (B5)
This pushbutton selects MPG Mode with 0.010mm distance move per
X10
increment of the handwheel.

MPG MODE -- 0.100mm (Push Button with LED) (B6)

This pushbutton selects MPG Mode with 0.100mm distance move per
X100
increment of the handwheel.

JOG MODE -- (Push Button with LED) (A5)


This button accesses the ’axis and direction’ push button selections to
provide ’continuous move’ axis jogs. (See push button references B9, D9,
C8 and C10 in this manual, and GE Fanuc Operators Manual -- III Operation
chapter 3.2).
In C--Axis Mode ON (M51 active), manual rotation of the spindle/chuck
using the Handwheel (MPG) control is possible proivided JOG mode is
selected ON.

OPERATION SELECT - PUSHBUTTONS

SINGLE BLOCK -- (Push Button with LED) (B1)


This push button allows an active part programme to be processed one block
at a time. When this feature is active each block must be started using the
CYCLE START push button. The single block push button is enabled in
AUTO & MDI mode. The LED is illuminated when SINGLE BLOCK is
active.

NOTE: It is permitted to use this push button to interrupt an active cycle.


For affect of single block on canned cycles refer to GE Fanuc oper-
ators manual.

BLOCK DELETE -- (Push Button with LED) (B2)


When BLOCK DELETE is active all programme blocks preceded by the
BLOCK DELETE character (/) are skipped during an NC cycle This push
button is enabled only in AUTO & MDI mode.

The LED is illuminated when BLOCK DELETE is active.

OPTIONAL STOP -- (Push Button with LED) (B3)


This push button enables the OPTIONAL PROGRAMME STOP feature.
When optional stop is active the NC cycle will stop on reading an M01 code
and can only be restarted by pressing the CYCLE START push button, all
existing modal programme information is unaffected by this function. This
push button is enabled in AUTO & MDI mode only.

The LED is illuminated when OPTIONAL STOP is activate.

DRY RUN -- (Push Button with LED) (C1)


When the DRY RUN feature is active, coolant flow is inhibited and the
feedrate specified by the NC programme is ignored.

The OVERRIDE SELECTOR switch is used to modify the DRY RUN


feedrate from 0.1M/min. to 10 M/min.

Page 3--6 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Rapid motions are conducted as normal and can also be overridden by the
OVERRIDE SELECTOR.
This push button is enabled in AUTO & MDI mode.
The LED is illuminated when DRY RUN is active.
Dry run can only be selected when the machine is not in cycle.
To start the cycle in dry run requires a double press of the CYCLE START
push button. On the first press an operator prompt message DRY RUN
ACTIVE REPRESS CYCLE START appears on the CRT as a warning that
DRY RUN is active.

PROGRAMME TEST -- (Push Button with LED) (C2)


When the programme test feature is active, all T and S codes and all of the
M codes with the exception of:M00, M01, M02, M30, M98 and M99 are
not processed.
This push button is enabled in AUTO & MDI mode. The LED is illuminated
when programme test is active.
PROGRAM TEST is used during programme checking and may also be
used in conjunction with AXES INHIBIT.

AXES INHIBIT -- (Push Button with LED) (C3)

X Z Axes inhibit suppresses all axis moves. The CRT display however is
updated as if the axis were not inhibited.
This push button is only enabled in AUTO & MDI mode whilst not in cycle.
The LED is illuminated when AXIS INHIBIT is active.
Axes inhibit is used during programme checking and may also be used in
conjunction with PROGRAM TEST.
AXIS/DIRECTION SELECTION PUSHBUTTONS
X+ AXIS (Push Button with LED) (B9)
*
+X This push button is used for continuous axis jogging in the X+ direction. It
is also used in the MPG mode for HANDWHEEL X axis selection where
upon both X+ and X-- push buttons are illuminated.

X-- AXIS (Push Button with LED) (D9)

--X This push button is used for continuous axis jogging in the X-- direction. It
is also used in the MPG mode for HANDWHEEL X axis selection where
upon both X+ and X-- push buttons are illuminated.

Z+ AXIS (Push Button with LED) (C10)


*
+Z This push button is used for continuous axis jogging in the Z+ direction. It
is also used in the MPG mode for HANDWHEEL Z axis selection where
upon both Z+ and Z-- push buttons are illuminated.

Z-- AXIS (Push Button with LED) (C8)

--Z This push button is used for continuous axis jogging in the Z-- direction. It
is also used in the MPG mode for HANDWHEEL z axis selection where
upon both Z+ and Z-- push buttons are illuminated.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--7


* NOTE: X+, and Z+ pushbuttons also illuminate; in Auto or MDI mode
when the corresponding machine axes are sent to their alignment
position using G28 and during the machine axes alignment se-
quence.

RAPID TRAVERSE (Push Button with LED) (C9)

This push button can be operated simultaneously with any power feed push
button to produce rapid axis jogging motion as long as the operator door is
closed.

PARTS CATCHER DOWN (Push Button with LED) (A6)

(only active when the parts catcher option is fitted)

This push button is used to jog the parts catcher down.


It is only active when not in cycle and with the operator door closed.

PARTS CATCHER UP (Push Button with LED) (A7)

(only active when the parts catcher option is fitted)

This push button is used to jog the parts catcher up.


It is only active when not in cycle and with the operator door closed.

TURRET JOG + (INCREMENT) (Push Button with LED) (C4)

This push button is used to jog the turret in the clockwise (CW)
incrementing count direction. (CW as viewed from spindle to turret).

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed, spindle is stationary
and the AUX 1 push button is pressed.

TURRET JOG -- (DECREMENT) (Push Button with LED) (C5)

This push button is used to jog the turret in the counter clockwise (CCW)
decrementing count direction. (CCW as viewed from spindle to turret).

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed, spindle is stationary
and the AUX 1 push button is pressed.

CHUCK -- ID GRIP (Push Button with LED) (A8)

This push button is used to select ID gripping of the chuck.

It is only active when not in cycle and the spindle is stationary.

CHUCK -- OD GRIP (Push Button with LED) (A9)

This push button is used to select OD gripping of the chuck.

It is only active when not in cycle and the spindle is stationary.

OFFSET MEASURE (Push Button with LED) (A10)

This push button is used to set offsets on the machine.


Refer to Fanuc manual for a full description of its use.

It is only active when not in cycle and the spindle is stationary.

Page 3--8 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


TOOL SETTING ARM DOWN (Push Button with LED) (D2)

This push button is used to jog the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) to its
down position -- Active position.

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed and the spindle is
stationary.

TOOL SETTING ARM UP (Push Button with LED) (D3)


This push button is used to jog the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) to its
up position -- Stowed position.

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed and the spindle is
stationary.

PROGRAM RESTART (Push Button with LED) (D1)

This push button is currently not used.

AUX 1 -- Auxillary Push Button (Push Button with LED) (C6)

AUX Used in conjunction with the Turret Jog + and Turret Jog -- push buttons.
1

COOLANT BUTTONS

COOLANT OFF (Push Button with LED) (F9)


This push button is used to manually turn the coolant flow off.

It is functional in all modes.


When selected during AUTO or MDI mode, M08 coolant on, is ignored.

COOLANT ON (Push Button with LED) (F8)

This push button is used to manually start the coolant flow and is active in
all modes, provided that the operator access door is closed.

When selected during AUTO or MDI modes M09 coolant off is ignored.

NOTE: Even if COOLANT ON is selected, the coolant flow is inhib-


ited during an automatic turret index but will restart on
completion of the turret index.

COOLANT AUTO (Push Button with LED) (F10)

This push button enables the coolant system to be controlled via coolant M
codes.

It is only selectable in AUTO or MDI modes.

NOTE: The COOLANT ON and COOLANT OFF push buttons can be


used during auto cycle, if COOLANT AUTO is to be overridden.

COOLANT AUTO is the default status when first selecting the AUTO or
MDI modes and assumed at the end of every programme.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--9


The coolant flow is automatically turned off by: M00, M01, M02, M06,
M09 and M30 codes, providing AUTO COOLANT is selected.

MISCELLANEOUS CONTROLS

MEMORY PROTECTION -- Keyswitch

This keyswitch is used to prevent part programs, offset values, parameters


and setting data from being registered, modified or deleted accidentally.

This switch is enabled in all operating modes. The named functions are
LOCKED OFF when the MEMORY PROTECTION KEYSWITCH is in
the ON position.

RS 232 SERIAL DATA PORT

The port can be used to interface any RS 232 serial data input / output device
via the machine mounted 25 pin D--type female socket. See chapter 10 of
this manual for set--up and operational description of this facility.

50 100
FEED/RAPID/JOG OVERRIDE -- Selector Switch

This selector switch is used to override:


0 150

1. Programmed Feedrate (Outer Scale 0--150%) in AUTO & MDI


mode.
If an override could result in a feedrate greater than the maximum
programmable feedrate, then the feedrate is clamped to that
maximum value.
2. Rapid Traverse (Inner Scale 0--100%) in AUTO/MDI/JOG modes.

3. Jog rate (Inner Scale 0--100%) in JOG mode only.


Selecting the 0% graduation causes a feedhold condition except during a
tapping cycle.

NOTE: Feed override is not possible whilst M46, G63 or Tapping cycles
are active.

EMERGENCY STOP (red mushroom pushbutton with latch)

Pressing this pushbutton causes an immediate slide and spindle stop,


followed by the removal of drive power. The pushbutton remains depressed
(latched) when actuated. Twisting the pushbutton in a counterclockwise
direction releases the Emergency Stop button.

The pushbutton is active at all times. See CAUTION.


CAUTION
Actuating this button with the
machine in a cutting cycle
may damage cutting tools
and work pieces.
Failure to follow this instruc-
tion may result in damage to
equipment.

Page 3--10 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


MTB OPERATORS CONTROL PANEL

Spindle
Loadmeter
% SPINDLE LOAD

Master 0 25 50 75 100 150 180

Start

Cycle Start
(duplicated)

Chuck P.B.
Unclamp
Chuck P.B.
Clamp

Tailstock
Retract

0
Tailstock Advance/
Step Advance

FANUC

50

Fig. 45
MTB Operators Control Panel

Spindle Load Meter

% SPINDLE LOAD

0 25 50 75 100 150 180

Yellow Band 100 --150% Red Band 150 --180%

Fig. 46
Spindle Load Meter

The load meter is graduated in percentage load of the maximum output of


the spindle motor.

0 to 100% Range (Continuous rating)

Providing the spindle load remains at 100% or less the machine spindle can
be run continuously.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--11


110 to 150% Range -- Yellow Band (30 minutes 50% rating)

For every minute or part of a minute up to a maximum of 30 minutes, that


the spindle load is in the 101 to 150% to range, there must either be an
equivalent time period immediately following this overload when the
spindle is in a NO LOAD condition, or a proportionally longer period of
time when the load remains within the continuous operating range.

151 to 180% Range -- Red Band (1 minute overload capacity)

For any period of time up to a maximum of 1 minute the spindle load can
enter the 151 -- 180% overload range. Immediately after this period however
the spindle must, for an equal period of time, be in a NO LOAD condition,
or for a proportionally longer period of time, must stay within the
continuous operating range.

NOTE: The above conditions are theoretical definitions and should only
be used as a guide.

In practice the spindle load is continuously varying and can therefore be


difficult to estimate. As a general rule the spindle load should be kept as
much as possible within the CONTINUOUS operating range with only
occasional loadings being used within the 101 to 150% YELLOW BAND
range.

CAUTION: The machine cycle should not take the spindle load into
the 151 -- 180% RED BAND range whilst cutting is being
carried out.
Only during acceleration of the spindle should the load
meter go to the full scale deflection (RED BAND).

MASTER START -- Illuminated push button

This push button is used to power up the control and axis/spindle drives in
a controlled sequence.

Depressing the master start push button will bring the CNC control power
on in a control EMG condition.

Repressing MASTER START -- on receipt of successful control power on,


will apply power to the spindle and axis drives, where upon the control
removes the EMG status indicator.

The control will report an EMG ALM condition, if the Emergency Stop
push button is depressed or if axes go into a hard OVERTRAVEL, or if any
other alarm is active which results in the removal of servo control.

The MASTER START push button is also used in the event of a hardware
axis overtravel, as it overrides the overtravel limit switches, whilst held
depressed. The axis drive power is thus reinstated, enabling the axis to be
jogged back, to within its normal operating range.

CYCLE START

This duplicated push button has the identical function to that of the CYCLE
START push button (F1) on the operators control panel.

See Page 3--4.

Page 3--12 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


HANDWHEEL (MPG)

0
When MPG mode is selected, clockwise rotation of the handwheel will
result in Positive axis motion and counterclockwise rotation will give
Negative axis motion.
FANUC
Axis selection is performed by using the relevant control panel push buttons.
50
MPG mode and the distance per increment are selectable from the control
panel push buttons.
Increments are:
0.001mm -- MPG x 1 pushbutton
0.010mm -- MPG x 10 pushbutton
0.100mm -- MPG x 100 pushbutton
Handwheel control of the machine axes (as described above) is possible
when C--Axis Mode OFF (M50) is active. In this mode, the operator door
may be open or closed whilst an axis is in motion.
In C--Axis Mode ON (M51 active), the handwheel may be used to control
rotation of the spindle/chuck. Handwheel mode is selected by pressing one
of the ’MPG Mode -- Distance/Increment’ push buttons on the operator
panel. The Spindle CW or Spindle CCW push button must be pressed to
engage the spindle/chuck; both CW and CCW button LED’s illuminate.
Clockwise rotation of the Handwheel produces a clockwise rotation of the
spindle/chuck as viewed from the +Z (tailstock) end of the machine.

CHUCK UNCLAMP push button


This push button unclamps the chuck.
It is only active when not in cycle and with the operator door open.
See NOTE 1 below.

CHUCK CLAMP push button


This push button clamps the chuck.
It is only active when not in cycle and with the operator door open.
See NOTE 1 below.

NOTE 1: The clamping/unclamping of the workpiece is determined


by the selection of ID/OD Grip.

WARNING
Chuck Operation
Do not operate the chuck at speeds (rpm) greater than its
maximum rated speed or at pressures greater than its max-
imum rated pressure. Refer to machine mounted plate or
chuck manufacturer. Reduce chuck speed (rpm) when us-
ing special top jaw tooling. Top jaws must not extend be-
yond the chuck diameter. Never place your hands or any
part of your body near the chuck when jogging the spindle,
adjusting thrust or pressure. Lubricate the chuck accord-
ing to the manufacturer’s specifications. Use jaw serra-
tions as noted on machine mounted plate or specified by
chuck manufacturer. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious personal injury.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--13


TAILSTOCK QUILL ADVANCE/STEP ADVANCE push button

This push button is used to advance the tailstock quill.


It has two modes of operation:--

a) Operator door open -- Step advance -- Quill stops advancing when


pushbutton is released. Quill is not held fully forward, i.e. Operator
door must be closed and pushbutton pressed to “lock” the tailstock
fully forward.

b) Operator door closed -- full advance -- Quill is held fully forward.


See WARNING.

TAILSTOCK QUILL RETRACT push button

This push button is used to retract the tailstock quill.


Operator door must be open for the tailstock to retract.

WARNING
Tailstock Quill Step
Tailstock Quill Step Advance must only be used for set--up
purposes as pressure is not maintained in its static posi-
tion. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.

Page 3--14 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Machine Pressure - Tailstock Thrust - Chuck Drawbar
Force -- Chuck Brake (Dampener) Control

This control panel is located on the front of the machine to the left of the
headstock and includes: main machine pressure gauge, tailstock thrust
gauge and pressure control knob, chuck drawbar force gauge and pressure
control knob. A further pressure gauge and control knob is also supplied to
adjust a chuck brake (dampener) when the C--Axis mode feature is present.

Machine Pressure -- The machine system operating pressure of 35 Bar


is indicated on the uppermost gauge. This pressure is set by a regulating
screw mounted on the top of the hydraulic system pump.

Tailstock Thrust -- The centrally located tailstock thrust gauge monitors


Machine Pressure Gauge
settings of the adjacent pressure regulating valve control knob. The
maximum thrust is 7.86kN @ 35 Bar.

When setting the tailstock quill pressure, advance the quill until the tailstock
center is engaged with the part, then adjust the valve until the desired
pressure setting is obtained.

Tailstock When setting a lower pressure, adjust the valve until the lower setting is
Pressure
Knob obtained. Retract the quill then advance it again to check for the correct
lower setting. If the pressure falls below 3 Bar before starting a cycle or
during a cycle, the machine will stop and display the appropriate alert.

Chuck Drawbar Force -- The lower chuck drawbar force gauge monitors
Tailstock Pressure Gauge
settings of the adjacent pressure regulating valve control knob. Chuck jaw
grip force must be checked a every 200 hours (minimum) of operation.

The main spindle chuck pressure regulating valve controls the gripping
force of the main spindle power chuck. Use the maximum pressure setting
unless the maximum pressure setting distorts the part.

The maximum force is 56.5kN @ 35Bar. Do not exceed the maximum


Chuck pressure stamped on this plate. If higher pressure is selected, high stress
Pressure
Knob forces are created within the chuck resulting in possible damage to the
chuck. Check the chuck manufacturer’s sprcifications for maximum
chucking pressures, maximum rpm and lubrication before using this
control.
Chuck Pressure Gauge
Fig. 47
Main Spindle Chuck & Tailstock Pressure Check the clamping force with a Static Grip Clamping Force Gauge (force
per jaw with spindle not running) and a Dynamic Grip Clamping Force
Gauge (force per jaw measured with the spindle running).

NOTE: Use the maximum manufacturer approved chuck clampimg force


pressure that will result in minimum part distortion.

Chuck Brake (Dampener): C--Axis Interpolation Mode -- The


purpose of this brake is to offer a degree of dampening to the cutting action
when the spindle chuck is in C--Axis interpolation mode and miscellaneous
code M53 is programmed. The minimum setting for the brake is 2 Bar.

CHUCK BRAKE PRESSURE GAUGE The amount of dampening is adjustable by the user and will depend on the
severity of the cutting process. Brake adjustment is via a regulating screw
Fig. 48 along side the pressure gauge.
Chuck Brake Pressure (Option)

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--15


MAIN POWER DISCONNECT SWITCH

See WARNING
WARNING
This switch is used to supply power to the machines main electrical cabinet
Place the MAIN POWER and is located on the rear door of the electrical cabinet.
DISCONNECT switch in
the OFF position, lock it When the switch is in the ON position: power is supplied to the machine
and tag it with a “DO NOT electrical cabinet.
START”sign before ser-
vicing the machine or Before servicing the machine or control, always place this switch in the off
control. position. Lock and tag this switch with a “do not start sign”.
Note: This switch does
not isolate the incoming It is also important to wait for the condensers in the servo drives to be
supply to the electrical completely discharged. A red LED is fitted to each servo drive power circuit
cabinet or the supply to PCB. The LED will remain illuminated whilst any charge remains in the
the Transformer Unit. condensers.
Failure to follow this in-
struction can result in ma-
chine damage and per-
sonal injury.

l
or

Page 3--16 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Optional Operating Devices

Swarf Conveyor

The swarf conveyor unit is positioned across the front of the machine with
the outlet hood on the right side of the machine.

Fig. 49
Swarf Conveyor Control Panel

1. Conveyor Control AUTO/ ON MAN/OFF -- Selector Switch

In AUTO selection, the chip conveyor will rotate continuously in its


normal clockwise direction when the operator door is closed and the
machine is set in--cycle by pressing the CYCLE START push button.

NOTE: The conveyor will stop if,

6) The EMERGENCY STOP push button is pressed.


7) The Operator Door is opened.

8) The MAN/AUTO selector switch is set to MANUAL.

In MAN (manual) selection, the swarf conveyor will remain stationary


unless the conveyor direction selector switch is set to Forward or
Reverse.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--17


2. CONVEYOR DIRECTION --Selector Switch (spring centered)

This switch is a jog facility operative only when the conveyor


MAN/AUTO selector switch is set to MANUAL.

With the conveyor direction switch held in the FWD (forward)


position, the conveyor will rotate in its normal clockwise direction;
when held in the REV (reverse) position the conveyor will rotate in a
counter--clockwise direction. When released, the switch will spring
back to the OFF (center) position.

3. EMERGENCY STOP - Push Button (Red Mushroom)

This push button is pressed to immediately stop machine cycle and


operation in the event of an emergency.

When this push button is pressed machine power drops, stopping the
feed of all axes and spindle. Control power will remain on and a
message is displayed on the control CRT, “MACHINE OFF E--STOP.”

The EMERGENCY STOP must be released before the machine can be


restarted. To release the button it must be twisted counter--clockwise.

If EMERGENCY STOP is pressed while the axes are not in motion an


automatic realignment is possible when the button is released.

Wash Gun

The Wash Gun (if supplied) is used by the operator to flush swarf into the
machine swarf collection tray, or swarf conveyor system (if supplied). The
wash gun facility may be used when,

-- The machine is not in--cycle.


-- The operator door is open.
-- The Coolant ON push button is pressed ON.

The wash gun is active for a period of 30 seconds after which the Coolant
ON push button must be pressed to restore the coolant supply to the wash
gun.

Page 3--18 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


GENERAL CHUCK SAFETY GUIDELINES

Observe these guidelines in the daily operation of the turning center. See
CAUTION.
CAUTION
1. Always lubricate the chuck according to the instructions given in this
Always observe the general
chuck safety guidelines in manual or the chuck manufacturer’s instructions.
the daily operation of the 2. Clamp all work fixtures securely before starting the machine. When
machine. Failure to follow
using work fixtures mounted in the chuck, use the chuck jaws to center
this instruction may result in
damage to the machine. the fixture only. Clamp the fixture to the chuck face using the tapped
holes and T--slots in the chuck face once the chuck jaws are secured
about the fixture. If appropriate, remove the chuck and mount the
fixture directly to the spindle.

NOTE: Do NOT place a chuck within a chuck already mounted to the


spindle.

3. Inspect the top jaws before starting any operation. In the event of a
wreck, always replace the top jaw hold down bolts.

4. Always replace the T--nuts, which clamp the top jaws to the master
jaws, at the first sign of wear.

5. Never use top jaws with worn or broken jaw serrations. On the first
operation, always ensure that the jaw serrations penetrate the part.

6. Load the part in the chuck with one jaw in the 6 o’clock position.

7. Never place your hands or any portion of the body, near the chuck when
jogging the spindle. See WARNING.
WARNING
Never place your hands or
any part of the body near
the chuck when jogging
the spindle. Failure to fol-
low this instruction may
result in serious personal
injury.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--19


CHUCKS
WARNING
Chuck Operation: Since a variety of chucks may be mounted on the machine, the following
information describes the general types of chucking systems that can be
Do not operate the chuck applied to the machine, top tooling recommendations, a general discussion
at speeds (rpm) greater of chuck jaw pressure, lubrication of chuck systems and some general chuck
than its maximum rated safety guidelines.
speed or at pressures
greater than its maximum
rated pressure. Reduce
chuck speed (rpm) when CHUCKING SYSTEM TYPES
using special top jaw tool-
ing. Top jaws must not These four types of chucks are recommended for use on these machines.
extend beyond the chuck Self--centering -- simultaneously moves all chuck jaws equally to center the
diameter. Never place workpiece in the chuck.
your hands or any part of
your body near the chuck Self--compensating -- used where there is a need to locate the workpiece
when jogging the spindle, from center holes, or other locating devices.
adjusting thrust or pres-
sure. Lubricate the chuck Combination -- combine both self--centering and self--compensating fea-
according to the tures in one chuck.
manufacturer’s specifica-
tions. Collet type -- ideal for bar stock, they are compatible with square, hexagonal,
and round shapes.
Failure to follow this
instruction may result in CHUCK
serious personal injury.
CENTRIFUGAL FORCE AND SPEED LIMITATIONS

Centrifugal force increases as the rpm increases and tends to throw the chuck
CAUTION 1 jaws outward. This decreases the part gripping force.
Do not operate the spindle at
Centrifugal force increases as the jaws are moved farther from the centerline
speeds greater than the
of the chuck, or are made heavier.
maximum rated speed for
the chuck. Failure to follow Exceeding a chuck’s rated speed results in high internal stresses and loss of
this instruction may result in clamping force. This can cause jaw and/or chuck component breakage
damage to the chuck and resulting in the release of the jaw and part. See CAUTION 1.
machine.
Top jaws should never extend beyond the diameter of the chuck.
Always reduce the spindle speed when using special top jaw tooling config-
CAUTION 2
urations. See CAUTION 2.
Always reduce spindle
speed when using special CHUCK LUBRICATION
top jaw tooling. Failure to fol-
low this instruction may All chucking systems require some type of lubrication. Chucks may be self--
result in damage to the lubricating, or require manual lubrication. If manual lubrication is required,
machine. follow the instructions in this section for standard chucks installed by the
factory. For other chucks, follow the chuck manufacturer’s specifications
for frequency and lubrication type.
CAUTION 3 Inadequate lubrication or use of the wrong type of lubricant will greatly
Always lubricate the chuck in reduce the chuck jaws grip force and allow the workpiece to slip or be
accordance with these thrown from the chuck.
instructions or follow the
chuck manufacturer’s speci- If in doubt about the lubrication requirements for the chuck, contact your
fications. Failure to follow local Cincinnati Machine Field Service Representative. See CAUTION 3.
this instruction may result in
Factory installed standard chucks that require manual lubrication should be
damage to the chuck and
lubricated once during every eight hours of operation.
machine.

Page 3--20 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


TOP JAW RECOMMENDATIONS

The following illustrations list general guidelines for designing and setting
chuck top jaws.

1 1

1. The length of the top jaws should


not exceed the height, and the
1 1
height of the top jaw should not
exceed the length of the master
jaw. Do not exceed a 1:1 ratio.

CORRECT INCORRECT

2. The gripping diameter should be


equal to, or greater than, the
diameter to be machined. When
this is not possible, reduce the
feed rate and the depth of cut.

CORRECT INCORRECT

3. Grip the workpiece as close to the


face of the chuck as possible.

CORRECT INCORRECT

4. Use special jaws with a longer grip


on large, long, or heavier workpiece.

5. Jaws should be designed so the


diameter fully contracts the work--
piece. Standard stepping top jaws
seldom achieve this goal.

CORRECT INCORRECT INCORRECT

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--21


6. Use pin type jaws to penetrate
forging, casting and irregular
surfaces.

3.2 mm (.125”) 60_

7. Use sharp 3.2 mm (.125 inch) pitch 60


degrees serrations on jaws for first
operations.

60_

8. The back of chuck jaws must be


ground after hardening.

PIN (IN JAW BOLT HOLE)

9. Bore soft jaws with a chucking slug


or ring under, or in front of, the top RING
jaw. Do not bore with the slug or ring
under the master jaws. The slug or ring
should be as far as possible from the
face of the chuck.
SLUG

10. Check the top jaws for “bell mouthing”.


This can cause the workpiece to move slightly
under a heavy cut and cause the cutting tool
to dig in. This can result in the workpiece being
scrapped or the workpiece coming out of the
chuck.

76 mm (3.0 ”)

11. Reduce the chucking pressure approximately


10% for each inch exceeding 76 mm (3 inches)
of jaws height to prevent breaking master jaws,
levers, or wedges.

76 mm (3.0 ”)

Page 3--22 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


12. On second operation jaws, use chrome-- moly
steel such as 4140 or 4150. To strengthen these jaws
and resist chipping, heat treat to 28-- 30 Rc. When
necessary, they can be true bored.

13. On rough surfaces, use 8615 steel jaws


to obtain greater core strength and
to resist fracturing under heavy gripping
pressure.

CHUCK

14. Use rocking jaws on rough castings


or forgings.

ROUGH WORKPIECE

WRAP AROUND
JAW

15. Use wrap-- around jaws on fragile


parts to distribute pressure over a
larger area and to minimize distortion.

FRAGILE
PART

16. On wedge chucks, grip the workpiece


1.6 mm (.06”) from the start of jaw
travel for best engagement of wedge
with the master jaw.

17. On lever chucks, grip the workpiece past


the middle of jaw travel for best gripping
conditions.

18. Do not grip another chuck in the


jaws of the chuck mounted to the spindle.

19. Although fixtures may be gripped in the


jaws of chuck for center location, the jaws
must be not be the sole mounting means.
Bolt the fixture to the chuck.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 3--23


Chapter 4
Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure
Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure

General

This section describes the operations required to start the machine and align
the control to the machine.

Start Up and Shut Down Procedures

Start Up

1. Ensure that the machine air supply is turned on and is up to


pressure.
2. Ensure sufficient hydraulic oil is in the hydraulic tank.

3. Turn the main disconnect switch to the ON position.


4. Press the MASTER START push button on the MTB operator
control panel.

This will apply power to the CNC and initiate a power start of the
control. After a few seconds, on successful control power up condition,
the CRT will flash the EMG condition indicator.

5. Re--press the MASTER START pushbutton. This will initiate a


power--up sequence of the axes and spindle drives and apply power to
the hydraulic unit. The EMG condition indicator is removed from the
display.
Care must be taken at this time, if the axes are moved under power feed
control, as there is no software range checking until the machine has
been aligned. See CAUTION.
CAUTION
Until the machine has been If the EMERGENCY STOP push button is latched down when the
aligned it is possible to feed MASTER START push button is pressed in step 3 the CRT will display
the axes beyond the autho- EMG ’ALM 1002 EMERGENCY STOP’ alarm. Release the EMER-
rized software feed limits. GENCY STOP push button to clear the alarm.
This may result in the remov-
al of power to the axis drives. If an AXIS OVERTRAVEL condition exists at the time of power--up use the
axis power feed controls whilst holding the MASTER START push button
depressed, the move all axes within their normal operaating range -- see
Chapter 5.

Shut Down

The normal safe shut down sequence is as follows:

1. Depress EMERGENCY STOP to ensure a controlled stop sequence


of the axis drives and to turn off the hydraulic motor.

2. Set the main machine power disconnect switch to the OFF position.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 4--1


Machine/Control Alignment Procedure

The operator must perform a machine/control alignment, each time the


control is turned on.

The slides and turret are aligned by using the ALIGN push button (A4) on
the operator’s panel.

The automatic alignment procedure first moves each axis to its reference
position, after which the linear axes are aligned to the control system by
moving each axis a small distance to search for the axis motor encoder
reference marker.

The axes are automatically moved to their reference position in a Z,X


sequence. As each axis is aligned to the control system the corresponding
axis powerfeed push button is illuminated. Once all active axes are aligned,
the ALIGN push button can be released.

AXIS ALIGNMENT SEQUENCE AXES ALIGNMENT COMPLETE


INDICATION
Z Z+ PUSHBUTTON ILLUMINATES

X X+ PUSHBUTTON ILLUMINATES

Turret Alignment

On completion of the machine axes alignment, the turret has to be aligned.


This is achieved by repressing the ALIGN push button in response to the
operator message: PRESS ALIGN P.B. TO REF TURRET. This will cause
the turret to rotate to position 1.

Drive Tool Machines only

The operator message: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE NOT ORIENTATED --


PRESS HOME PB TO ORIENTATE SPINDLE REFERENCE TURRET.
Pressing the home push button will cause the driven tool spindle to orientate
and the turret will then rotate to position 1.

Turret alignment must be completed with the X and Z axes at their extreme
positive axis positions. See WARNING.

WARNING
Turret alignment can only take place with X and Z axes at
their positive limits. The operator must ensure that, at this
position, turret rotation will not cause a collision with tool-
ing or workpiece.

On successful completion of axes and turret alignment, the ALIGN push


button will illuminate and remain illuminated until the machine is switched
off or an alert is posted which could result in the loss of alignment.

Page 4--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Chapter 5
Software and Hardware Axis Overtravel
Software Axis Overtravel

A software axis overtravel conditon occurs if an axis is commanded to go


beyond its normal operating range, indicated by the following alarms:

500 OVER TRAVEL: +X


501 OVER TRAVEL: --X
500 OVER TRAVEL: +Z
501 OVER TRAVEL: --Z

During a software overtravel conditon, the control only permits the axis to
move back from the software overtravel condition.

CANCELLING SOFTWARE RANGE CHECKING

It may sometimes be necessary to temporarily cancel the software range


checking feature, to enable the axes to be powerfed back to within their
normal operating ranges.

To cancel software range checking:

1. Turn the main power disconnect switch to the OFF position.


2. After a few seconds set the main power disconnect switch to the on
position.
3. Depress and hold down both P and CAN keys on the MDI keypad.

4. Depress MASTER START to initiate a control power start.


5. Once control is powered up release P and CAN keys on the MDI
keypad.

6. The software range checking is now ineffective and therefore it is


possible to drive an axis beyond its software range limits.

Hardware Axis Overtravel

Prior to completion of machine alignment, it is possible to feed the axes


beyond the authorised software limits. This action may result in a servo fail
alarm.

It will be necessary to use the following procedure to move the overtravelled


axis back to within its normal operating range.

1. Try to establish the reason why the overtravel condition occurred. If the
overtravel occurred for no apparent reason check the general condition
of the axis motor electrical connectors and cables. If the condion of
these is good proceed with caution.
2. Power down control, isolator off.

3. Power back up control.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 5--1


4. Select MPG mode.

5. Using the MPG (handwheel) move the axes back within their normal
operating range. The axis jog mode is disabled when the axes are not
aligned.

Note: It may be necessary to supress the axis softwarelimits in order to


move the axes back into their normal operating range.

Page 5--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Chapter 6
G codes
G codes

The following G codes are supported on the Cincinnati Machine range of


lathes.

G--code of group 00 except G10 and G11 are single--shot G--codes.

P/S alarm (no. 010) is displayed when a G--code not listed in the G--Code
list is specified or a G--code without a corresponding option is specified.

G code System A is set as standard.


G--code systems B and C are purchased options -- contact Cincinnati
Machine if option is required.

Refer to FANUC Manual B--63084 EN/01 for a complete description of the


G Codes.

G CODE
GROUP FUNCTION
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear Interpolation (cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 G02 Circular Interpolation CW or Helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular Interpolation CCW or Helical interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
00
G05 G05 G05 High speed cycle cutting
G07 G07 G07 00 Hypothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
00
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input cancel
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
21
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(G113) (G113) (G113)
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 6--1


G CODE
GROUP FUNCTION
A B C
G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position
00
G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting
01
G34 G34 G34 Variable--lead thread cutting
G36 G36 G36 Automatic tool compensation X
00
G37 G37 G37 Automatic tool compensation Z
G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation left
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation right
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max. spindle speed setting
00
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2
Polygonal turning cancel
(G250) (G250) (G250)
20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2
Polygonal turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G55 G55 G55 Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection
G56 G56 G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
14
G57 G57 G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection
G58 G58 G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection
G59 G59 G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro calling
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call cancel
G68 G68 G68 Mirror image for double turrets ON or balance cut mode
04
G69 G69 G69 Mirror image for double turrets OFF or balance cut mode cancel

G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle


G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating
G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling
G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling
G76 G76 G78 Multiple threading cycle

Page 6--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


G CODE
GROUP FUNCTION
A B C
G80 G80 G80 Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G86 G86 G86 10 Cycle for face boring
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24 Endface turning cycle
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 G94 G94 Per minute feed
05
G99 G95 G95 Per revolution feed
-- G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
-- G91 G91 Incremental programming
-- G98 G98 Return to initial level (See Explanations 6)
11
-- G99 G99 Return to R point level (See Explanations 6)

Assumed at Control Power ON.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 6--3


Chapter 7
M codes
M codes
Miscellaneous codes are programmed using a maximum of one M code per
block with a value range of 0 to 99.
These codes are used to control a variety of machine related functions,
including spindle, coolant and tool change.

M codes supported on Cincinnati Turning Centres


M codes marked thus * are available as options or are necessary to support
optional machine configurations, eg: Parts Catcher, Barfeed, etc.
M codes marked thus * support the Driven Tool option, if fitted.

M CODE FUNCTION

AT END OF

AT CONTROL
START OF
EFFECT1VE

POWER ON
EFFECTIVE

ASSUMED
SPAN

SPAN
00 PROGRAM STOP n
01 OPTIONAL PROGRAM STOP n
02 END OF PROGRAM n
03 START SPINDLE CCW n
04 START SPINDLE CW n
05 SPINDLE STOP n n
08 COOLANT START n
09 COOLANT STOP n n
13 SPINDLE START CCW WITH COOLANT n
14 SPINDLE START CW WITH COOLANT n
19 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP n
30 END PROGRAMME & RETURN TO START n
34 * PARTS CATCHER ADVANCE n
35 * PARTS CATCHER RETRACT n n
44 * RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) UP n
45 * RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) DOWN n n
46 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%) n
47 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ENABLE n n
48 SPINDLE OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%) n
49 SPINDLE OVERRIDE ENABLE n n
50 ** C--AXIS MODE OFF n n
51 ** C--AXIS MODE ON n
52 ** C--AXIS BRAKE ON (IN--POSITION MODE) n
53 ** C--AXIS BRAKE ON (INTERPOLATION MODE) n
54 ** C--AXIS BRAKE OFF n

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 7--1


M CODE FUNCTION

AT END OF

ASSUMED AT
START OF
EFFECT1VE

EFFECTIVE

POWER ON
CONTROL
SPAN

SPAN
61 * BARFEED MACRO CALL n
68 * ADVANCE TAILSTOCK QUILL n
69 * RETRACT TAILSTOCK QUILL n n
70 * M70 CUSTOMER OUTPUT n
71 * M71 CUSTOMER OUTPUT n
72 * M72 CUSTOMER OUTPUT n
73 * M73 CUSTOMER OUTPUT n
74 COLLET CHUCK MODE DISABLE n n
75 COLLET CHUCK MODE ENABLE n
76 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CW n
77 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CCW n
78 RELEASE CHUCK JAWS n
79 GRIP CHUCK JAWS n
80 * BARFEED EJECT/RELOAD NEW BAR n
86 * BARFEED PRESSURE ON (HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY) n
87 * BARFEED PRESSURE OFF (HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY) n
90 * BARFEED MODE ON n
91 * BARFEED MODE OFF n
92 * BARFEED ROTATION ON n
93 * BARFEED ROTATION OFF n n
94 * INCREMENT PARTS COUNTER (Parameter 6710 = 94) n
98 SUBROUTINE CALL n
99 END SUBROUTINE n

Function Description of M Codes


M00 PROGRAMME STOP (STOPS SPINDLE)
M00 stops the machine cycle at the END of the block in which it is
programmed. The spindle and coolant are stopped and the machine put out
of cycle. Pressing CYCLE START will cause the NC cycle to continue from
the next block, restarting the spindle and coolant if previously actioned.

M01 OPTIONAL PROGRAMME STOP (STOPS SPINDLE)


M01 has the same function as M00 except it is only actioned if the operator
has selected the OPTIONAL STOP feature to be active. If the feature is not
active the programme continues without actioning the M01.

M02 END OF PROGRAMME


M02 causes the active programme to terminate and the spindle and coolant
to stop.

Page 7--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


M03 START SPINDLE CCW
Note: CCW as viewed from Tailstock to Headstock

M03 is used to start the spindle rotation in a counter clockwise direction.


The spindle will rotate at the last programmed S word value. If the code is
programmed in a block containing a none rapid traverse axis motion, then
motion is inhibited until the spindle is up to speed. If the current block is a
rapid traverse block the motion will continue until a none rapid block is read
with the spindle not yet at the programmed speed.

M04 START SPINDLE CW

Note: CW as viewed from Tailstock to Headstock


M04 is used to start the spindle rotation in a clockwise direction. The spindle
will rotate at the last programmed S word value. If the code is programmed
in a block containing a none rapid traverse axis motion, then motion is
inhibited until the spindle is up to speed. If the current block is a rapid
traverse block the motion will continue until a none rapid block is read with
the spindle not yet at the programmed speed.

M05 SPINDLE STOP


M05 is used to stop the spindle. It causes further processing of axis moves
or other blocks to be inhibited, until the spindle is stopped.

M08 FLOOD COOLANT START


M08 is used to tun on the flood coolant flow. There is no interlocking
between the code and block processing, the programmer must allow
sufficient feed stoke to assure adequate coolant flow before cutting starts.
If dry run is active then this code is inhibited.

M09 COOLANT OFF


M09 is used to turn the coolant off.

M13 START SPINDLE COUNTER CLOCKWISE WITH COOLANT

M13 is used turn on the flood coolant flow and start the spindle in the CCW
direction simultaneously.

M14 START SPINDLE CLOCKWISE WITH COOLANT

M14 is used turn on the flood coolant flow and start the spindle in the CW
direction simultaneously.

M19 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP


This code stops the spindle/chuck and turns off the coolant. The code forces
the spindle to stop at a preset ’orient position’ and inhibits further block
processing until orientation is complete. M19 is operable when C--Axis
Mode OFF (M50) is active. In certain instances, the oriented spindle stop
may facilitate the loading and unloading of workpieces.

M30 END OF PROGRAM AND REWIND


M30 terminates the active programme, stops the spindle and coolant flow,
and returns the cursor back to the start of the programme.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 7--3


M34 PARTS CATCHER ADVANCE
M34 moves the parts catcher forward to the collect position. Operator door
must be closed and tool setting arm, if fitted, must be parked.

M35 PARTS CATCHER RETRACT


M35 retracts the parts catcher. Operator door must be closed and tool setting
arm, if fitted, must be parked.

M44 RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) UP


M44 retracts the Renishaw Tool setting arm (TSA) to its parked (stowed)
position. Operator door must be closed and parts catcher, if fitted, must be
retracted.

M45 RENISHAW TOOL SETTING ARM (TSA) DOWN


M44 retracts the Renishaw Tool setting arm (TSA) to its down (active)
position. Operator door must be closed and parts catcher, if fitted, must be
retracted.

M46 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%)

M46 once programmed inhibits the use of the feedrate override selector
switch and clamps the programmed feedrate to 100%. It is cancelled on
receipt of any one of the following:--
M47
M02
M30
RESET
EMERGENCY STOP
OPERATING MODE CHANGE i.e. AUTO TO EDIT

M47 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE ENABLE


M47 is used to cancel M46 and allows the feedrate override selector to be
used to modify any programmed feedrate with the exception of the cutting
motion of a G74 or G84 tapping cycle.
Feedrate override enable is assumed at control power on.

M48 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE DISABLE (100%)

M48 once programmed inhibits the use of the Spindle Speed override keys
and clamps the spindle speed to 100% of the programmed speed. It is
cancelled on receipt of any one of the following:--
M49
M02
M30
RESET
EMERGENCY STOP
MODE CHANGE i.e. AUTO TO EDIT

M49 SPINDLE SPEED OVERRIDE ENABLE


M49 is used to cancel M48 and allows the spindle override keys to be used
to modify the programmed spindle speed.

Page 7--4 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Spindle speed override enable is assumed at control power on.

M50 C--AXIS MODE OFF (Driven Tool Machines only)


M50 cancels C--Axis mode and returns the main spindle/chuck to normal
G96/G97 speed control. An S--word associated with a spindle start M--Code
will command the spindle/chuck to rotate at the programmed speed.
Processing the M50 code automatically releases the C--Axis brake
mechanism. M50 may be programmed when the following functions are
active:M51 takes the machine out of C axis mode. Any S word for speed
programmed are output to Main Spindle Chuck -- see Chapter 10 ’Driven
Tools’.
-- G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OFF
-- G40 Tool Nose Radius Compensation OFF
-- M05 Spindle Stop
Also see Chapter 10, Driven Tools.

M51 C--AXIS MODE ON (Driven Tool Machines only)


M51 places the machine in C--Axis mode. The main spindle/chuck rotation
is programmed via a C--word and any S--word associated with a spindle start
M--Code is output to the active Driven Tool Spindle on the turret. M50 may
be programmed when the following functions are active:M51 places the
machine in C axis mode, i.e. the main spindle (chuck) is now programmed
with a C word and any S words for speed are output to driven tool spindle
on the turret -- see Chapter 10 ’Driven Tools’.
-- G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OFF
-- G40 Tool Nose Radius Compensation OFF
-- M05 Spindle Stop

Note; The operator access door is held latched whilst M51 is active, even
when the machine is not in--cycle. If a cycle is interupted when
C--Axis mode is active the M50 code (C--Axis mode Off) must be
processed to release the door latch.
Also see Chapter 10, Driven Tools.

M52 C--AXIS BRAKE ON (In--Position Mode, Driven Tool Fea-


tureDriven tool machines only)
M52 applies a mechanical brake ON to the stationary spindle/chuck. The
brake provides the necessary workpiece rigidity for certain machining
operations using Driven Tools mounted in the turret.
The M52 code is functional when C--Axis mode is set ON, i.e: M51 active.
The M52 function remains ON until cancelled by:--
M50 -- C--Axis Mode OFF
M53 -- C--Axis Brake ON (Interpolation Mode)
M54 -- C--Axis Brake OFF
M52 is programmed in a block prior to a C--Axis rapid motion command.
Also see Chapter 10, Driven Tools.

M53 C--AXIS BRAKE ON-- (Interpolation Mode, Driven Tool Fea-


ture)Half pressure -- contouring
(Driven tool machines only)

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 7--5


M53 applies a mechanical brake partially ON to the spindle/chuck. The
brake provides a degree of dampening and stability to the spindle/chuck
during profile milling operations, using Driven Tools mounted in the turret.
Brake pressure control and adjustment is given in Chapter 3 of this manual.

The M53 code is functional when C--Axis mode is set ON, i.e: M51 active.
The M53 function remains ON until cancelled by:--

M50 -- C--Axis Mode OFF


M52 -- C--Axis Brake ON (In--Position Mode)
M54 -- C--Axis Brake OFF

M53 is programmed in or before the first C--Axis feed motion block.

Also see Chapter 10, Driven Tools.

M54 C--AXIS BRAKE OFF (Driven Tool Machines only)


M54 releases the brake from the spindle/chuck. The brake must be released
using the M54 code prior to subsequent rotation of the spindle/chuck under
C--Axis positioning control.

The M54 code is functional when C--Axis mode is set ON, i.e: M51 active.
The M54 function remains ON until cancelled by:--
M52 -- C--Axis Brake ON (In--Position Mode)
M53 -- C--Axis Brake ON (Interpolation Mode)

C--Axis Brake OFF command is also included in the functionality of the


C--Axis Mode OFF (M50) code.

M54 is programmed in a block following a C--Axis motion command.


Also see Chapter 10, Driven Tools.

M61 BARFEED MACRO CALL


M61 is used to call the Barfeed macro to eject the billet and reload a new
bar. Refer to chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed macro.

M68 ADVANCE TAILSTOCK QUILL

M68 advances the tailstock quill.

M69 RETRACT TAILSTOCK QUILL

M69 retracts the tailstock quill.

M70 TO M73 CUSTOMER OUTPUTS (OPTIONAL)


These codes can be used by a customer to switch on any ancillary equipment
that he chooses to operate via the part programme.

If the M70 -- M73 option is provided, the machine will be equipped with four
110V AC triac modules and four 24V DC feedback terminals, for wiring
details refer to the machines Electrical Schematic diagram.

M70 -- M73 can be configured to operate in 1 of 2 different modes:--

1) M70 -- M73 outputs turn on and remain on until a different


M70 -- M73 code is programmed

Page 7--6 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


2) M70 -- M73 outputs turn on and remain on until the
corresponding feedback input is obtained.

M74 COLLET CHUCK MODE DISABLE


M74 places the control/machine back into normal chucking mode.
Programmed in MDI mode only.

M75 COLLET CHUCK MODE ENABLE


M75 places the control/machine in collet chuck mode. Programmed in MDI
mode only.

M76 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CW


M76 forces turret rotation to be in the clockwise direction. (Normal turret
rotational is by shortest path). Refer to chapter 9 for a description of the use
of M76.

M77 FORCE TURRET ROTATION CCW


M77 forces turret rotation to be in the clockwise direction. (Normal turret
rotational is by shortest path). Refer to chapter 9 for a description of the use
of M77.

M78 CHUCK OPEN


M78 opens the chuck jaws, whether a conventional chuck or a collet chuck
is used. Used for Barfeed and Bar--puller applications.

M79 CHUCK CLOSE


M79 closes the chuck jaws, whether a conventional chuck or a collet chuck
is used. Used for Barfeed and Bar--puller applications.

M80 BARFEED EJECT/RELOAD NEW BAR


M80 is used only in macro O9020 -- Barfeed macro. Refer to chapter 13 for
a description of the barfeed macro.

M86 BARFEED PRESSURE ON


(HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY)
M86 switches on Barfeed pressure to push the bar out of the Barfeeder.
Refer to chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed unit.

M87 BARFEED PRESSURE OFF


(HYDRAFEED AND FEEDMASTER ONLY)
M86 switches off Barfeed pressure. Refer to chapter 13 for a description of
the barfeed unit.

M90 BARFEED MODE ON


M90 places the control in Barfeed mode. Programmed in MDI mode only.
Refer to chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed unit.

M91 BARFEED MODE OFF


M91 takes the control out of Barfeed mode. Programmed in MDI mode
only. Refer to chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed unit.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 7--7


M92 BARFEED ROTATION ON

M92 rotates the spindle/chuck at a preset slow speed to assist barfeed


advance. See Chapter 13, Barfeeder.M92 reduces chuck rotation to a “jog”
value set by Keep Relays. Spindle rotation will be clockwise (CW as viewed
from Tailstock to Headstock) -- see chapter 13 ’Barfeeder’.

M93 BARFEED ROTATION OFF

M93 stops spindle/chuck rotation. See Chapter 13, Barfeeder.M93 stops


chuck rotation -- see chapter 13 ’Barfeeder’

M94 INCREMENT PARTS COUNTER

M94 increments the parts counter (when parameter 6710 is set to 94).M94
will increment the parts counter when parameter 6710 is set to 94.

M98 SUBROUTINE CALL

Refer to GE Fanuc operators manual.

M99 END OF SUBROUTINE

Refer to GE Fanuc operators manual.

Page 7--8 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Chapter 8
Spindle Functions
Spindle Functions
The machine is fitted with a Headstock driven by an infinitely variable AC
motor. Spindle speeds are specified in direct rpm (in 1rpm increments) by
an S word. For spindle speed range, refer to Machine Specification, chapter
2, in this manual.

The maximum programmable spindle speed may be set to a value below


maximum RPM of the machine using the G92 Sxxxx command, see GE
Fanuc Operators Manual II Programming, Chapter 9.

The spindle rotation is started by programming an M03, M04, M13 or M14


code. The spindle may also be restarted by pressing the SPINDLE CW or
SPINDLE CCW pushbuttons.

M03 causes the spindle to rotate in a counter clockwise direction and M04
causes clockwise rotation. CW and CCW are viewed from Tailstock to
Headstock. If the spindle is attempted to be restarted after an auto cycle
interrupt, and the spindle CW or CCW pushbutton used does not match the
last programmed spindle direction then the spindle restart is rejected and the
operator prompted accordingly.

Rapid axis moves are permitted to continue while the spindle is accelerating
or decelerating. Programmed feed moves are not actioned until the spindle
reaches its commanded speed.

The following functions cause the spindle to stop:--

1. M00 Programme stop

2. M01 Optional stop (when selected)

3. M02 End of programme

4. M05 Spindle stop

5. M30 End of tape

6. Spindle stop pushbutton

7. Alerts generating spindle stop

Driven Tool Machines


When the machine is in C--Axis mode -- M51 programmed -- the main
spindle (chuck) is programmed with a C word along with an appropriate
feedrate.

All S words for speed are output to driven tool spindle on the turret, as with
normal rotation it must be started by programming an M03, M04, M13 or
M14.

The above seven functions which stop the main spindle (chuck) also apply
to the driven tool spindle.

The below spindle jog does not apply to the Driven tool spindle, only the
main chuck spindle.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 8--1


Spindle Jog
This feature allows the spindle to be jogged at approximately 8 RPM whilst
depressing either the SPINDLE CW or SPINDLE CCW pushbutton
providing the machine is not in cycle or a cycle interrupted condition, and
the operator door is closed. Spindle jogging is provided to allow hands off
spindle workpiece inspection.

Page 8--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Chapter 9
Tooling Functions
Tool Turret

The turret disc is directly mounted onto a servo driven turret indexing head.
Both 8 and 12 position Turrets are available in the Hawk range of turning
centres.

Fig. 50
12 Position Turret - showing Rotation Directions

Turret Indexes

The turret can be indexed at any point within the programmable range of the
machine.

Normal turret indexes are bi--directional and shortest path. Forcing turret
WARNING
direction can be used -- see below.
When indexing the turret
make sure that the indexing To keep cycle time to a minimum, it is often desireable to keep the retract
radius of the longest tool for a turret index to a minimum. It is therefore up to the operator/program-
will clear the workpiece/ mer to ensure that a turret index does not cause a collision. See WARNING.
chuck and axis way guard-
ing, so that a collision does Driven Tool Machines
not occur.
On Driven Tool machines, turret indexes may require an orientation of the
Failure to follow this warn- driven tool before a turret index can take place. This is to correctly position
ing may result in personal the drive mechanism inside the turret before indexing.
injury and/or machine dam-
age.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 9--1


T Word

A 4--digit T code is programmed to select a turret position.

The first 2 digits represent the turret position, the second 2 digits represent
the offset number.
T xx xx
Tool offset number

Turret position
Programming example:

N130 G00 X200 Z300 -- Move to a safe turret index position


N140 T0505 -- Index to turret position 5 and use Offset value
No. 5.
N150 X150 Z237 -- Next machining block

Force Turret CW and CCW

As mentioned previously normal turret indexes are bi--directional and


shortest path. The following two M--codes are used to force the turret
rotation in a particular direction:--

M76 -- Force turret rotation clockwise (CW)


M77 -- Force turret rotation counter clockwise (CCW)

These two M--codes are non--modal being active only on the block in which
they are programmed. Both M--codes must be programmed on the same
block as a T--code.

e.g. N130 T0707 M76 -- Index turret CW to position 7.

Tool Life Management

Refer to GE FANUC operators manual (B--63084EN/01) for a full


description of this feature.

Page 9--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Chapter 10
Driven Tools
Introduction

The Driven Tools feature enables cutting tools mounted in the turret stations
to be rotating tools. Drills, taps, boring tools, milling cutters, etc., may be
mounted in the turret to perform specific rotating tool machining tasks in
association with the spindle/chuck operating in C--Axis positioning/inter-
polating mode (M51) active.

In C--Axis mode (M51), the spindle/chuck may be positioned in rapid or


feedrate mode. Feedrate mode is adopted for profile milling applications
under Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1) mode, or Polar Co--ordinate
Interpolation (G12.1) control. When interpolation modes G07.1 and G12.1
are turned off, the C--Axis is best utilised in a positioning role for hole
making operations, for which the spindle/chuck moves to position at rapid
rate.

C--Axis Mode Enable/Disable

The C--Axis mode of operation may be enabled/disabled when the following


group of Gxx and Mxx codes are active:

-- G40 Tool Nose Radius Compensation OFF


-- M05 Spindle Stop
-- G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation OFF
-- G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation OFF
-- Mxx

where:

Mxx = M51 C--Axis Mode Enable


(Spindle/Chuck in C--Axis mode ON)
or
M52 C--Axis Mode Disable
(Spindle/Chuck in C--Axis mode OFF)

The codes should be processed in the order shown.

C--Axis Initialisation

Once in C--Axis mode, it is necessary to rotate the spindle/chuck to the


C--Axis origin position prior to processing any specific C--Axis positioning
command. The recommended block sequence for C--Axis initialisation is
given below:

G40
M05
G13.1
M51
G0 G28 C0 Rotate spindle/chuck to C--Axis zero position.

C--Axis Positioning Mode

Once the C--Axis is initialised, it may operate in positioning mode using the
basic contouring mode G--codes G00 and G01. The Tool Nose Radius
Compensation feature (G40 -- G42) does not perform correctly in this mode

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 10--1


and should be utilised in the interpolation mode of C--Axis application.
C--Axis positioning mode is best utilised for hole making operations
incorporating standard canned cycles to perform drill, tap and bore cycles.
Programming Considerations
1. Positioning Mode Operation
Driven tools operating parallel to the Z--Axis perform ’Front’ machining
cycles. Driven tools mounted in a right angle head on the turret (operating
parallel to the X--Axis) perform ’Side’ machining cycles. See Fig. 51.

Fig. 51
Driven Tool Setup - Positioning Mode

2. C--Axis Position Command


The C--Axis command defines the angular position in degrees around the
workpiece.

Fig. 52
C-- Axis Positioning

The figure above shows the spindle/chuck at the C 0.000 degree position.
A positive C--Axis command (eg: C 0.000 to C+90) is seen as a CW rotation

Page 10--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


of the spindle/chuck to the +90 degree position. A negative C--Axis
command (eg: C 0,000 to C--90) is seen as a CCW rotation of the
spindle/chuck to the --90 degree position. The C--Axis should be treated as
a linear axis in which there is only one zero degree point. A command from
the zero point to C--1440 results in the spindle/chuck rotating four
revolutions in the CCW direction to the minus 1440 degree position.

3. Canned Cycle Operation

Specific rules for establishing R and Z/X positions are as follows:

a) The R--plane level measured from the Initial Position is a radial


distance and is normally negative.

b) The canned cycle hole depth is expressed as a Z--word in Front


Machining mode and as an X--word in Side Machining mode. Hole
Depth is measured as the distance from the hole bottom to the position
of the axis program zero. Specifically in Side Machining mode, the
hole depth X--value is expressed as a ’diameter’ distance from X0, the
workpiece centre of rotation. Hole Depth Z or X commands are
normally negative.

For further detailed information concerning Canned Cycle operation, refer


to GE FANUC Operators Manual, publication B--63084EN/01, II--Pro-
gramming, Chapter 13.3.

Example 1: Canned Cycle -- Front Machining

Fig. 53
Canned Cycle - Front Machining

N65 G0 G98 G40 Tool Radius Offset Cancel


N70 M5 Spindle Stop
N75 M50 C--Axis Mode Off
N80 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation Off
N85 G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation Off
N90 G28 U0 W0 XZ Retraction to Align Reference Point
N95 T0404 Tool Selection
N100 M51 C--Axis Mode On
N105 M54 C--Axis Brake Off
N110 G0 G28 C0 Initialise C--Axis at zero degree position

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 10--3


N115 M8 Coolant On
N120 F100 S760 M3 Feed/Speed (CW) for Driven Tool
N125 X150 Z20 C90 Rapid XC to Hole Position/Z at Clearance
N130 M52 C--Axis Brake On
N135 G83 R--18 Z--30 Drill 30mm Deep/Retract to Initial Position
N140 M54 C--Axis Brake Off
N145 G0 C180 Rotate C--Axis to 180 degree position
N150 M52 C--Axis Brake On
N155 G83 R--18 Z--30 Drill 30mm Deep/Retract to Initial Position
N160 M54 C--Axis Brake Off
N165 G0 C270 Rotate C--Axis to 270 degree position
N170 M52 C--Axis Brake On
N175 G83 R--18 Z--30 Drill Hole 30mm Deep
N180 G80 M9 Cancel G83 Canned Cycle/Coolant Off
N185 M5 Spindle Stop
N190 M50 C--Axis Mode Off/C--Axis Brake Off
Example 2: Canned Cycle -- Side Machining

Fig. 54
Canned Cycle - Side Machining

N265 G0 G99 G40 Tool Radius Offset Cancel


N270 M5 Spindle Stop
N275 M50 C--Axis Mode Off
N280 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation Off
N285 G07.1 Cylindrical Interpolation Off
N290 G28 U0 W0 XZ Retraction to Align Reference Point
N295 T0505 Tool Selection
N300 M51 C--Axis Mode On
N305 M54 C--Axis Brake Off
N310 G0 G28 C0 Initialise C--Axis at zero degree position
N315 M8 Coolant On
N320 F100 S760 M3 Feed/Speed (CW) for Driven Tool
N325 X150 Rapid X--Axis to Clearance
N330 Z--15 C90 Rapid ZC Axes to +90 degree position
N335 M52 C--Axis Brake On
N340 G87 X10 R--23 Q15000 Peck Drill Through/Retract to R--position
N345 M54 C--Axis Brake Off
N350 G0 C--90 Rapid C--Axis to --90 degree position

Page 10--4 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


N355 M52 C--Axis Brake On
N360 G87 X10 R--23 Q15000 Peck Drill Through/Retract to R--position
N365 G80 M9 Cancel G87 Canned Cycle/Coolant Off
N370 M5 Spindle Stop
N375 M50 C--Axis Mode Off/C--Axis Brake Off

C--Axis Interpolation Mode

Selection of Interpolation mode allows the machine to perform a variety of


milling operations to the workpiece billet, from simple flat surface
generation to complex profile machining. There are two interpolation
functions which may be selected when the C--Axis is active and initialised;
these are:

-- Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation (G12.1).


-- Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1).

Programming Considerations

1. Interpolation Mode Operation

Profile milling of the end face of a billet is controlled via Polar Co--ordinate
Interpolation with the driven tool mounted directly in the turret station. See
Fig. 55. Milling operations peformed along the length of a billet is
controlled via Cylindrical Interpolation with the driven tool mounted in a
right angle head from the turret station. See Fig. 55.

Fig. 55
Driven Tool Setup - Interpolation Mode

2. C--Axis Position Command

In Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation (G12.1) mode, the C--Axis is considered


as a linear axis with metric (or imperial) measuring units. The X--C plance
(see Fig. 56), programmed in Cartesian co--ordinates defines the end face
machining of a workpiece billet.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 10--5


Fig. 56
C-- Axis Position Command

In Cylindrical Interpolation (G07.1) mode, the C--Axis units remain in


degrees measured around the billet periphery. The development of the
cylinder into a Z--C plance (see Fig. 56) and programmed in Cartesian
co--ordinates, defines the area around and along the length of the workpiece
billet.

3. Programming Rules

-- The chosen interpolation mode may be turned on once the C--Axis is


active and initialised.

-- When the interpolation mode is active:

-- G00 rapid positioning mode is not allowed.

-- Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G41/G42) may be applied, but


must be cancelled (G40) prior to terminating the interpolation
mode.

-- M53 C--Axis brake (for profile milling) may be applied to offer


stability to the metal cutting action. See Chapter 3 of this manual
for Brake Pressure Control and Adjustment details.

-- G12.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation mode -- ON


G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation mode -- OFF

-- G107.1 Hxxx.xxx Cylindrical Interpolation -- ON


where Hxxx.xxx is the radius of the cylinder
G107 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation OFF

For Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation:

-- X co--ordinate is a ’diameter’ value.


-- C co--ordinate is a ’radius’ value.
-- I co--ordinate is the incremental distance to the X--Axis centre
point position for circular interpolation.
-- J co--ordinate is the incremental distance to the C--Axis centre
point position for circular interpolation.

Page 10--6 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


For Cylindrical Interpolation:

-- Z co--ordinate is the actual position value along the billet.


-- C co--ordinate is the actual angular position around the billet.
-- R co--ordinate is the radius value for circular interpolation. Centre
point co--ordinates are not allowed.
-- The G18 interpolation plane must be established prior to invoking
Cylindrical Interpolation mode.
i.e: G18 W0 H0
where, W is the incremental mode address for the Z--Axis.
and H is the incremental mode address for the C--Axis.
-- The radius of cylinder (H--word) is specified in the G07.1 block
when turning on Cylindrical Interpolation mode. It is not possible
to change the cylinder radius until Cylindrical Interpolation is first
turned off and then turned on again with the desired cylinder
radius.

Example 1: Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation

The example below is to be read in conjunction with the Polar Co--ordinate


Interpolation feature description given in the GE FANUC Operators
Manual, publication B--63084EN/01, II Programming, Chapter 4.4.

Fig. 57
Polar Co-- ordinate Interpolation

N0186 G0 G18 G40 G97 G99 TNRC Off. Speed in RPM. Feed/Rev.
N0187 M5 Spindle Stop
N0188 M50 C--Axis Mode Off
N0189 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation Off
N0190 G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation Off
N0191 G28 U0 W0 XZ Retraction to Align Reference Point
N0192 T0404 Tool Selection
N0193 M51 C--Axis Mode On
N 0194 M54 C--Axis Brake Off
N0195 G0 G28 C0 Initialise C--Axis at zero degree position
N0196 M8 Coolant On

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 10--7


N0197 S1000 M3 Spindle Start (CW) for Driven Tool
N0198 X120 Z20 C0 Advance to clearance position
N0199 M53 C--Axis Brake partially On
N0200 G12.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation On
N0201 G42 G1 X40 F0.15 TNRC On/Feed to profile
N0202 C10 )
N0203 G03 X20 C20 R10 ) Geometry Program
N0204 G01 X--40 ) (program based on Cartesian
N0205 C--10 ) Co--ordinates on X--C’ plane)
N0206 G03 X--20 C--20 I10 J0 )
N0207 G01 X40 Feed to Profile Corner
N0208 C0 Feed to start point on profile
N0209 G40 X120 F5 M09 Fast Feed to clearance/Coolant Off
N0210 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation Off
N0211 M5 Spindle Stop
N0212 M50 C--Axis Mode Off
Example 2: Cylindrical Interpolation
The example below is to be read in conjunction with the Cylindrical
Interpolation feature description given in the GE FANUC Operators
Manual, publication B--63084EN/01, II Programming, Chapter 4.5. The
Cylindrical Interpolation example program given in that chapter is to be
ignored.

Fig. 58
Cylindrical Interpolation

N0286 G0 G40 G97 G99 TNRC Off. Speed in RPM. Feed/Rev.


N0287 M5 Spindle Stop
N0288 M50 C--Axis Mode Off
N0289 G13.1 Polar Co--ordinate Interpolation Off
N0290 G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation Off
N0291 G28 U0 W0 XZ Retraction to Align Reference Point
N0292 T0404 Tool Selection
N0293 M51 C--Axis Mode On

Page 10--8 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


N0294 M54 C--Axis Brake Off
N0295 G0 G28 C0 Initialise C--Axis at zero degree position
N0296 M8 Coolant On
N0297 S1000 M3 Spindle Start (CW) for Driven Tool
N0298 G00 Z100 X125 C0 Rapid Advance to Start Point
N0299 M53 C--Axis Brake partially On
N0300 G01 X100 F.15 Feed Advance to Cutting Depth
N0301 G19 W0 H0 Zet Z--C Interpolation Plane
N0302 G07.1 H60 Cylindrical Interpolation On
N0303 G01 G42 Z120 F.25 TNRC On/Feed to profile
N0304 C30 )
N0305 G02 Z90 C60 R30 )
N0306 G01 Z70 )
N0307 G03 Z60 C70 R10 ) Geometry Program
N0308 G01 C150 ) (Program based on Cartesian
N0309 G03 Z70 C190 R75 ) Co--ordinates on Z--C plane)
N0310 G01 Z110 C230 )
N0311 G02 Z120 C270 R75 )
N0312 G01 C360 )
N0313 G40 Z100 TNRC Off/Feed to Start Point
N0314 G07.1 C0 Cylindrical Interpolation Off
N0315 M54 C--Axis Brake Off
N0316 X125 F5 M09 Fast Feed to Clearance/Coolant Off
N0317 M5 Spindle Stop
N0318 M50 C--Axis Mode Off

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 10--9


Chapter 11
Toolsetter
Introduction

This chapter describes how to use the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA)
and the Renishaw High Precision Manual Tool Setting Arm (HPA)
incorporating Renishaw macro “Type B” tool setting software. The
documentation in this chapter has been reproduced with kind permission of
Renishaw plc.

The documentation and macro programs may not be reproduced, stored or


transmitted, wholly or in part, in any form or by any means, without prior
notice.

TSA

The Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) consists of a Motorised Hub, an arm
which can be configured for different applications, an electronic interface
and a probe.

The TSA is used for setting X and Z Tool offsets.

Fig. 59
Probe Configuration

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--1


HPA

The Renishaw High Precision Manual Toolsetting Arm consists of Base


assembly, Arm assembly and probe stylus. The HPA is a manually loaded
arm which, like the TSA, is used for setting X and Z tool offsets.

4mm AF Allen key

1. Base
2. Manual Locking Lever
3. Protective Cover
4. Arm Assembly
5. Alignment Marker
6. M5x20 Socket Head Capscrew (3 off)
7. Clamping Collar
8. Stylus Assembly

Fig. 60
Probe Configuration

Macro Probing Routines


Probing routines (macros) are protected and stored within the main part
program memory.

Macro No. Description Memory Used

O9011 Semi Manual Tool Setting 3.7 kb


O9012 Auto Tool Setting 2.4 kb

NOTE: Macro O9012 is not available with the HPA Manual Tool Setting
Arm.

Manual Tool Setting

The “Manual Tool Setting” MACRO O9011 will suit users who want to
position the tool close to the stylus using Jog Mode before setting a tool.
When using this method, it is not necessary to load any approximate tool
data in the Tool Offset registers prior to running a cycle.

NOTE: ALL tool movements within the macro are restricted to the (Bb)
box distance (default 6mm (0.236in) maximum movement, and
the moves are fully protected in the event of a collision.

Page 11--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Auto Tool Setting -- TSA only
The “Auto Tool Setting” MACRO O9012 can be used to automatically
position the tool to the stylus as well as set the tool. It will be necessary to
load nominal tool data in the Tool Offset registers prior to running a cycle.
If using the macro for calibration, it will also be necessary to enter nominal
calibration data.

Operator and Programming Notes


1. Macro O9011 can be called with G124
2. Macro O9012 can be called with G125 -- TSA only
3. Probing macros can be called in MDI and Memory modes of operation.
4. Probing feedrates are automatically converted to suit inch or metric
programming.
5. Tool setting routines inhibit the use of the feedrate override control.
The Feed hold push button is still active.
6. An active feedrate (programmed prior to invoking a tool setting
routine) is not retained on completion of the tool setting routine, and
must be reprogrammed as necessary.
7. See chapter 14 for a list of variables used by Renishaw TSA macros.
8. When the HPA is fitted to the machine -- locked in position -- turret
index/jogs can only occur if the turret is at the Z--axis high limit.
Tool Setting Arm Activation - TSA
The Tool Setting Arm (TSA) is moved to its active (down) and stowed (up)
position in two ways:--
1. M44/M45 M--codes
2. Operator panel membrane keys

M44 TSA Up
M44 retracts the TSA to its parked -- up (stowed) position. Operator door
must be closed and parts catcher, if fitted, must be retracted.

M45 TSA Down


M45 moves the TSA to its down (active) position. Operator door must be
closed and parts catcher, if fitted, must be retracted.
Program example using M44 and M45
O0001 (TOOL PROBE) Program number
G21G90G0
G0X150Z230M9 Safe start position
M45 TSA down
T0404 Turret index to position 4 with offset 04
G98 Feed per minute
G125 Call macro O9012
M44 TSA up
G0X150Z230 Back to safe position
M30 End of program

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--3


Tool Setting Arm Down Pushbutton

This pushbutton is used to jog the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) to its
down position -- Active position.

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed and the spindle is
stationary.

Tool Setting Arm Up Pushbutton

This pushbutton is used to jog the Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) to its
up position -- Stowed position.

It is only active when not in cycle, operator door closed and the spindle is
stationary.

HPA -- Manual Toolsetting Arm

Fitting Arm

1. Remove the Protective cover (protective cap) by rotating the Manual


Locking lever anticlockwise.

2. Locate the tool setting arm on the base, lining up the alignment market
(”Red Dot”) with the locking lever.

3. Rotate locking lever clockwise to lock the arm in position. Probe is


now armed.

Removing Arm

1. Rotate the locking lever anticlockwise and remove the arm.

2. Locate the protective cap on the base, lining up the alignment marker
(”Red Dot”) with the locking lever.

3. Rotate locking lever clockwise to lock the cap in position.

TSA/HPA Calibration

TSA/HPA calibration must be performed for the following reasons:--

S If it is the first time your probe system is to be used

S If a new stylus is fitted to your probe

S If it is suspected that the stylus has become distorted or that the probe
has crashed

S At regular intervals to compensate for mechanical changes of your


machine tool

S If repeatability of relocation of the probe in its operating position is


poor. In this case, the probe may need to be re--calibrated each time it is
selected.

Two different operations are used to calibrate a probe. They are:--

1. Calibrating using the Manual Cycle -- macro O9011

2. Calibrating using the Auto Cycle -- macro O9012 -- TSA only

Page 11--4 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Stylus Alignment
When the probe system is assembled and mounted on the machine, the
alignment must be set and position of the stylus must be found, before the
Tool Setting cycles can be used.

Stylus Alignment

The faces of the cube stylus are accurately manufactured to be square and
parallel to each other, so aligning just one face will automatically align all
faces. Adjust the stylus face height so that the faces are central about the
spindle centre line.

Check that the stylus faces are aligned with the machine axes. It can be
useful to use a tool mounted in the turret as a stylus triggering device. The
machine coordinates at the trigger point can be compared to a second trigger
point further along the stylus face. Usually alignment to within 0.010mm
(0.0004in) is recommended, but this depends on the application.

Stylus Position

When calibrating for the first time it is recommended to use the macro
O9011 Manual Cycle. Calibration must be made with a Master Tool of
known dimensions. It is not necessary to have any idea of the stylus face
coordinates because the macro runs incrementally from a start point and
determines the calibration values based on the Master Tool dimensions. It
can sometimes be done using the turret faces, using zero (0) Master Tool
dimensions.

Control Options

The following features must be installed to support the Tool Setting


Software.

S Fanuc G31 Standard or High Speed Skip must be installed and


operational.

S Fanuc user macro ’B’ programming option (standard on Hawk lathes).

S Sufficient part program memory to install this package together with


working part programs.

Standard Calibration Data -- Base Number 522

Calibration data will be stored in the following macro variables using the
default Base Number.

#522 = X+ Cube face


#523 = X-- Cube face
#524 = Z+ Cube face
#525 = Z-- Cube face
#526 = Y+ Cube face
#527 = Y-- Cube face
#530 = X direction stylus size
#531 = Z direction stylus size

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--5


Adjusting the Software Back Off Distance

The software will use the standard back off distance of 1mm, which is
adequate for most installations.

If the cycle will not run when installed, examine the tool measuring
movements when triggering on the stylus. If the tool does not retract off the
surface sufficiently after the first touch to enable a reseat of the probe, the
back off distance should be increased to suit.

Edit variable as follows in macro O9011.

#529 = 1.0 ..... Change value to suit -- factory set.

NOTE: If when running a cycle the machine axes do not move and NO
alarm is generated, check that the relevant ’G’ code for feed / min
has been selected.

Macro Parameters
Below is a list of all possible macro parameters for O9011 and O9012
macros.

NOTE: It is recommended to use the decimal point with all input data,
however, it may be possible on some machines to omit this.

Entering Input Data on the cycle call line will override any
other default conditions.

Bb b= The box distance that the tool will move within, once moved to
the start position in front of the stylus (Default = 6mm (.236in)

Cc c= The cutter diameter offset. This may be used to set a cutter/drill


to its centreline position by touching the stylus on one edge.
(Default = 0)

NOTE: Cc can also be used during a calibration cycle and only with
vectors H5, H6, H7, H8.

Hh h= The Tool Nose Vector. This is used to select the correct tool path
movements and measuring direction for the type of tool.

NOTE: The Tool Nose Vector will be taken from the Tool Offset page
under the ’T’ address by default if Hh is not used.

Tt t= Tool Offset number. This selects the Tool Offset number to be set.
(Default will use the current active tool offset number, or the Tool
number if the offset is not active.

NOTE: The Tool Offset will be the active Tool Offset, or the Tool Sta-
tion if the Tool Offset is not active by default if Tt is not used.

The input is also used to define the Tool Offset where the Mas-
ter Tool dimensions are stored when calibrating the Probe
Stylus.

K1. 1.= This is used to indicate a Probe Stylus calibration cycle. One or
two adjacent stylus faces will be set depending on the H input
used.

Page 11--6 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


K2 2.= This is used to indicate a Probe Stylus calibration cycle. As for
K1, but the OPPOSITE stylus face will also be set. This method
will allow all faces of the stylus to be calibrated by touching on
any two adjacent faces. (Experience stylus dimensions for the
stylus size must be entered in #530 and #531 before this feature
can be used).

When K2 is used, the opposite stylus faces will be found by calculation.

Example:X-- stylus face = X+ stylus face -- #530


Z-- stylus face = Z+ stylus face -- #531

Typical values for a 10mm (0.3937in) cube stylus.

#530 = 19.940 (0.7850in) X diameter/radial width


#531 = 9.970 (0.3925in) Z axis width

NOTE: When Kk is not used, tool setting is assumed. Do not mix K1


and K2 inputs on the same call line.

Mm m= Broken tool checking tolerance (M.2 indicates a +2/--2 tolerance)


(Default = 0).

Rr r= Approach position in front of stylus (Default = 25mm [0.984in])

Ww

Uu
Uu

Ww

Uu u= X axis tool tip geometry POSITIONING adjustment. This is


additional to the Bb distance. (Default = 0).

Ww w= Z axis tool tip geometry POSITIONING adjustment. This is


additional to the Bb distance. (Default = 0).

*Xx x= X axis Tool Offset RESULT adjustment amount. (Default = 0).

*Zz z= Z axis Tool Offset RESULT adjustment amount. (Default = 0).

NOTE: * These values can be used to make small compensations to the


setting results. In applications where the nominal tool lengths
are allowed for by the machining program, zero nominal val-
ues must be set in the tool registers. This is achieved by enter-
ing the tool geometry amounts in the Xx and Zz values.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--7


Tool Nose Vector Hh

S The tool movement directions will be established by the selection of a


suitable Hh vector number.

S Tools must be positioned to one of the positions shown according to the


type of tool when using the Manual Cycle macro O9011.

S Hh numbers correspond with the ’T’ address on the Tool Offset page.

Bb

H4 H8 H3

Bb

REAR
H5 H7
TURRET
MACHINE
X+

H1 H6 H2

Z+

H1 H6 H2
X+

FRONT
H5 H7
TURRET
MACHINE

H4 H8 H3

Page 11--8 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Calibration

Manual Calibration - Macro O9011

Introduction

Calibration is achieved using macro O9011 directly as described here, or


indirectly by using the Auto cycle O9012, which will also automatically
position the Master Tool to the stylus for you.

If using the Auto Cycle macro O9012, approximate calibration data MUST
be entered in the calibration data variables before calibrating.

Macro O9012 is not available with the HPA.

Description

The Probe must first be ’jogged’ to its down position using the TSA down
push button, or manually fitted in the case of the HPA.

The Master Tool must be selected in MDI mode and positioned in JOG or
HANDWHEEL mode to a suitable start position. The cycle will move the
Master Tool from the start position to the stylus face(s) as specified by the
Tool Nose Vector Hh and then retract back to the start position. Calibration
values are found for the stylus.

Application

a) The Probe Stylus faces must be set parallel to the axes.

b) The Master Tool Offset Data must be entered in the Tool Offset register
page before running the calibration.

c) The Master Tool and Offset number should be selected using MDI
mode, so that the screen information about the current tool is updated.

d) Prepare a simple program to call the cycle using either the G124 or
G65P9011 command and enter the K1. or K2. Input to indicate that a
calibration cycle is required. Enter other optional inputs. (See Macro
Parameters).

e) Position the tool at a suitable start point in JOG or HANDWHEEL


mode within the Bb box distance.

f) Run the G124 cycle.

Format

[ ] denote optional parameters.

G124 Kk [Bb Cc Hh Tt]


Alternative:
G65 P9011 Kk [Bb Cc Hh Tt]

Example: G124K1.B10.C10.H3.T2.

Macro Parameters

Kk Bb Cc Hh Tt

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--9


Outputs
Calibration values for each stylus face can be found. The values are
distances to the stylus faces in machine coordinates.

#531
X+ (#511)

#522
(#502)

#530
Stylus
(#510)

#523
(#503)

Z+
#525 #524
(#505) (#504)

NOTE: If the machine is set for diameter programming, then the #530
variable must be diametral.
Example 1 -- Calibration

Master
Tool

H3

When the program is run, the stylus calibration values are stored in #522 and
#524 (+X, +Z faces). To set the opposite faces of cube #523 and #525 (--X,
--Z faces), a new vector Hh must be used in with a different style Master
Tool.
Alternative: The K2. Input can be used to calibrate all four stylus faces. (See
the Kk input description in Chapter 3 -- Inputs).

NOTE: Position the Master Tool within the box distance Bb from the
face(s) of the stylus before running the cycle.
0500 Calibration program
G124K1.T2.H3. Calibration of two adjacent stylus faces.
M30 End program.

Page 11--10 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Manual Tool Setting - Macro O9011

NOTE: The procedure for Tool Setting is the same as for Calibration, ex-
cept that you do NOT enter Kk input.

Description
The Probe must first be ’jogged’ to its down position using the TSA down
push button.
The tool must be selected in MDI mode and positioned in JOG or
HANDWHEEL mode to a suitable start position. The cycle will move the
master tool from a start position to the stylus faces as specified by the Tool
Nose Vector Hh and retract back to the start position. The Tool Offset values
will be found and stored in the Tool Offset registers.

Application
a) The Tool Probe stylus faces must be calibrated before setting tools.
b) It is NOT necessary to enter approximate tool offset values, unless
using the Auto Cycle O9012.
c) The tool and offset should be selected using MDI mode, so that the
screen information about the current tool is updated.
d) Enter the optional inputs as listed below in Inputs.
Alternative: The cycle can be run without any inputs provided the
Tool/Offset is selected in MDI mode, and the Tool Nose Vector number is
entered on the Tool Offset page under the ’T’ address.

NOTE: Entering the input data on the cycle call line will override any oth-
er default conditions.
e) Position the tool at a suitable start point in JOG or HANDWHEEL
mode within the Bb box distance.
f) Run the G124 cycle.

Format
[ ] denote optional parameters.
G124 [Bb Cc Hh Tt Mm Xx Zz Uu Ww]
Alternative:
G65 P9011 [Bb Cc Hh Tt Mm Xx Zz Uu Ww]
Example: G124B10.C10.H3.T2.M.1X100.Z70.U3.W3

Macro Parameters
Bb Cc Hh Tt Mm Xx Zz Uu Ww

Outputs

Set a Tool
The Tool Offset register will be set. On machines with both geometry/wear
registers, the wear compensations will be zeroed (o) and the geometry
registers will be updated.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--11


Broken Tool Check

When the Mm input for broken tool check is used, an alarm is generated and
the machine will stop if the tool is out of tolerance.

Example: Set a Turn Tool

When the following program is run, the X and Z tool offset registers are set
for tool 1.
H3
NOTE: Position the tool within the box distance from each face of the sty-
lus before running the cycle.

0501

G124T1.H3. Set the Turn Tool 1

M30 End program.

Set a Turn Tool

Example: Set a Cutter to Centre Line

When the following program is run, the side of the cutter will touch the
stylus and because of the Cc input used, the tool will be set to centre line
instead of the edge of the tool. This will be useful for drills etc. where the
centre line position is required.

NOTE: Position the tool within the box distance from the face of the stylus
before running the cycle.

0502

G124T3.H8.C10. Set tool 3 to centre line

Set a Cutter to Centre Line


M30 End program.

Example: Set a Cutter Length

When the following program is run, the end cutter face will touch the stylus
and set the Z length.

NOTE: Position the tool within the box distance from the face of the stylus
before running the cycle.

0503

G124T3.H7. Set tool 3 for Z length

M30 End program.

Set a Cutter for Length

Page 11--12 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Example: Set a Boring Tool

When the following program is run, the X and Z tool offset registers are set
for tool 2.

NOTE: Position the tool within the box distance from each face of the sty-
lus before running the cycle.

0504
H1
G124T4.H1. Set the Boring Tool 4

M30 End program.

Set a Boring Tool

Example: Broken Tool Check

When the following program is run, the X and Z tool offset registers of tool
2 is checked for a broken tool condition.
H3
The TSA is ’jogged’ down manually.

0505
.
.
Complete the machining sequence with the current tool
.
(BROKEN TOOL CHECK)
G28U0W0 Return tool to home
Broken Tool Check G10P0X--12.1Z--160.2 Set program to X+, Z+ corner of the stylus
G0X6.Z3. Move to start position
G98 Feed per minute
G124T5.H3.M.1 Broken tools check. A ’BROKEN TOOL’
alarm will result if the tool is out of
tolerance
G28U0W0 Return tool to home
.
Continue with next tool
.

NOTE: See the optional Auto cycle macro O9012 for a simpler program-
ming method.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--13


Example: Calibration and Tool Setting

Cautions: When using either vector H1., H5., or H6., the tool must
first be moved clear of the cube before returning home.

Prior to setting tools, approximate tool offset values must


be entered in the tool offset registers.

O506(CALIBRATION/TOOL SETTING)
G28U0W0
G10P0X--12.1Z--160.2 Set program to X+, Z+ corner of the stylus
(OPTIONAL CALIBRATION)
/T0303(MASTER TOOL)
/G0X6.
/Z3.
/G124H3.K1. Calibrate probe
/G28U0W0
/M00
(TOOL SETTING)
T0101(20MM DRILL)
G0X--10.
Z3.
G98 Feed per minute
G124H7. Set drill length in Z
G0X26.
Z--15.
G124H8.C20. Set drill to centre line
G28U0W0
T0303(TURN TOOL)
G0X6.Z3.
G124H3. Set turn tool in X Z
G28U0W0
T0414(GROOVING TOOL T4 OFFSET 14)
G0Z--13. 10mm stylus
X6.
G124H4. Set tool in X Z
G28U0W0
M30

NOTE: See the Auto Cycle macro O9012 for a simplified programming
method.

Page 11--14 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Auto Tool Setting - Macro O9012 - TSA Only

Caution: It is necessary to have calibrated the probe stylus, and en-


ter nominal data in the Tool Offset register before running
this cycle.

Description

This macro is an optionally installed macro to supplement the O9011 macro.


The cycle will automatically move the tool to the stylus start point where
the O9011 macro is called. The cycle then returns to the original start point.

Application

Load nominal tool data into the Tool Offset registers before running the
cycle. Program the Tool Setting Arm down (M45 M--code) and select the
tool. The cycle will then measure the tool in either or both the X, Z
directions depending on the vector used. Program the Tool Setting Arm Up
(M44 M--Code).

Format

[ ] denote optional parameters

G125 [Bb Cc Hh Kk Tt Mm Xx Zz Rr Uu Ww]


Alternative:
G65 P9012 [Bb Cc Hh Kk Tt Mm Xx Zz Rr Uu Ww]

Example:
G125B10.C10.H3.K1.T2.M.1X100.Z70.R30.U3.W3.

Macro Parameters

Caution: The H5 vector is for turning type tools ONLY because the
approach path is around the X+ side of the stylus.

Bb Cc Hh Kk Tt Mm Xx Zz Rr Uu Ww

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--15


Example: Showing Simplified Programming Format

The Hh and Tt inputs are used in this example, but they are optional and
default conditions could be used.

O0050(TOOL SETTING)
(*) Optional loading of tool data
(LOAD T1 DATA)
G10P10001X76.Z85.Q2
G10P1X0Z0
(LOAD T3 DATA)
G10P10003X95.Z38.Q8
G10P3X0Z0
(*) End of tool data loading
G28U0
G28W0
M45 Tool setting arm down (active)
(*)

T0101(REAR BORE TOOL H1)


G98 Feed per minute
G125T1.H1W1.

T0202 (BORE TOOL H2)


G125T2.H2U2.W1

T0303 (TURN TOOL H3)


G125T3H3

T0404 (REAR TURN TOOL H4)


G125T4H4U--2.

T0505(REAR TURN TOOL H5)


G125T5.H5

T0606 (GROOVE BORE H6)


G125T6.H6

T0707 (S/DRILL H7)


G125T7.H7

T0707(S/DRILL X C/LINE H8)


G125T7.H8C10.

M44 Tool setting arm up (stowed)


M30

Page 11--16 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Example: Broken Tool Check

When the following program is run, the X and Z Tool Offset registers of tool
2 is checked for a broken tool condition.
H3 0505
.
.
Complete the machining sequence with the current tool
.
(BROKEN TOOL CHECK)
G28U0W0 Return tool to home
M45 Tool Setting Arm Down (Active)
G98 Feed per minute
Broken Tool Check G125T5.H3.M.1 Broken tools check. A ’BROKEN TOOL’
alarm will result if the tool is out of
tolerance
G28U0W0 Return tool to home
M44 Tool Setting Arm Up (Stowed)
.
Continue with next tool
.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 11--17


Chapter 12
Parts Catcher
Introduction

This chapter describes the use of the parts catcher. The parts catcher is an
optional device fitted to the operator door to catch parts cut off from bar
stock. The option is normally fitted to machines equipped with a Barfeeder.

Operator Door

Access
Door

Catcher Open

Fig. 61
Parts Catcher fitted to Operator Door

Operation

The Parts Catcher is advanced and retracted in two ways:--

1. M34/M35 M--codes

2. Operator panel membrane keys

M34 Parts Catcher Advance

M34 moves the parts catcher forward to the collect position. Operator door
must be closed and tool setting arm, if fitted, must be parked.

M35 Parts Catcher Retract

M35 retracts the parts catcher. Operator door must be closed and tool setting
arm, if fitted, must be parked.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 12--1


Parts Catcher Advance Push Button

This push button is used to jog the parts catcher down. It is only active when
not in cycle and with the operator door closed.

Parts Catcher Retract Push Button

This push button is used to jog the parts catcher up. It is only active when
not in cycle and with the operator door closed.

Operator and Programming Notes

1. The two push buttons are only active with the operator door closed.

2. If a Tool Setting Arm is fitted it must be parked before the parts catcher
can be advanced.
3. Both M--codes are used in the M61 barfeed macro automatically. See
chapter 13 for a description of the barfeed macro to catch an ejected
billet.

Programming Example

N350 T1010 Parting off tool selected


N360 G97 S1500 M3 Direct RPM selected -- Spindle started
N370 G95 F0.06 Feed per rev selected
N380 G0 X30 Z--5.1 Move to position
N390 G1 X8 M8 Feed with coolant ON
N400 M34 Parts Catcher Advanced
N410 G1 X0 Feed to X0 -- Material Parted off
N420 M35 Parts Catcher Retracted
N430 G0 X30 Rapid clear in X axis
N450 G0 X120 Z150 Rapid X and Z axes to a safe position

Page 12--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Chapter 13
Barfeeder
Introduction
This chapter describes the use of the barfeeder. The barfeeder is an optional
device fitted to the Hawk range of lathes. As standard 3 different types of
barfeed are fitted to Hawk lathes:--

1. Hydrafeed -- Hydraulic operated unit


2. Feedmaster -- Pneumatic operated unit
3. Multifeed -- Hydraulic operated multiple bar unit

Each of the above units is supplied with an operating manual, which should
be used in conjunction with this chapter.

Bar Preparation

30
The outboard end of the bar stock should be chamfered at an angle to match
the pusher head. Typical pusher heads have a 30 degree angle.

When hollow bar stock is being machined with a hydro--dynamic type bar
feed unit, plug the outboard end of the tube to prevent hydraulic oil from the
bar feed unit from flowing through the tube and mixing with the cutting fluid
in the machine.

M--Codes

The following M--codes are used with the bar feed units:
O--RING M90 -- Bar Feed mode on.
30 )
-- MDI program only.

M91 -- Bar Feed mode off.


-- MDI program only.

M92 Rotate Spindle CW


HOLLOW STOCK BAR -- Reduces Spindle Rotation Speed to a “jog” value set by Keep Relays.
PLUG -- See Barfeed Spindle Rotation Bits for spindle speed.

M93 -- Rotate Spindle CW OFF.


-- Spindle will stop.

M78 -- Open jaws.


-- Collet Open signal set on to barfeed unit when chuck is open.

M79 -- Close jaws.


-- Collet Open signal set off when chuck is closed.
WARNING M86 -- Bar Feed Pressure on.
-- Hydrafeed and Feedmaster only.
DO NOT Program an M87
-- Program at start of program.
M--code when the lathe is
in cycle with a part in the M87 -- Bar Feed Pressure off.
chuck/barfeed. This will -- Hydrafeed and Feedmaster only.
damage the barfeeder -- To be programmed carefully -- see WARNING.
unit as the bar will not be
held central and will vi-
brate violently.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 13--1


M61 -- Used on Multifeed units only.
-- Calls Macro O9020 (Multifeed Reload Macro).
-- Macro detects end of bar and reloads a new bar.
-- Optional parameter Zzzz.zzz -- Z Axis Backoff. If no Zzzz.zzz
value is programmed then a 150mm backoff is performed to eject
billet.

M80 -- NOT TO BE PROGRAMMED -- Used in Macro O9020


-- Eject Bars end (billet) and reloads new bar.

Standard Barfeed Sequence for Multifeed Unit:--

Barfeed into AUTO mode. (Refer to Barfeed Operating Manual)

S Program M90 in MDI mode -- this puts machine in Barfeed Mode


S Load part program into memory
S Cycle start on the program

The part program consists of the following:

1. “

2. “ -- machine component

3. “

4. Part--off component.

5. M92 -- Reduce spindle speed to jog rate -- only program if required.

6. Index turret to Bar stop.

7. Position X and Z axes to within 10mm off the end of Bar.

8. Program M61 Zzzz.zzz -- Check end of bar -- reload new bar if


necessary.

9. Program M78 -- Chuck open.

10. Z axis move -- Z move = length of bar.

11. M79 -- Chuck close.

12. Move turret clear.

13. M93 -- “Turn off” spindle jog rate -- only program if required.

14. “

15. “ -- machine component (centre drill and advance tailstock


if necessary).

16. “

17. “

S M91 in MDI mode, if necessary to take the lathe out of Barfeed mode.

Page 13--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


M61 -- Macro Code (shown for information purposes only)

O9020 (Multifeed Reload Macro) -- Prog. No.


M69 -- Retract Tailstock
#100=#1000 -- Let #100 = user input value 1 or 0
IF[#1000 EQ 0]GOTO 99 -- Goto N99
IF[#26 NE #0] GOTO 1
#26=150
N1#101=#26
G00W#101 -- Incremental Z move out
M34 -- Parts catcher out
M78 -- Chuck open
M80 -- Eject billet
M35 -- Parts catcher in
G00W--#26 -- Incremental Z move in
M80 -- Reload new bar
G4X2.0 -- Dwell 2 seconds
M79 -- Chuck close
N99 M99 -- End of macro

Program M61 -- 150mm +ve incremental Z move.

Program M61 Z250 -- 250mm +ve incremental Z move.

Standard Barfeed Sequence for Hydrafeed and Feedmaster

Barfeed into AUTO mode. (Refer to Barfeed Operating Manual)

S Program M90 in MDI mode -- this puts machine in Barfeed Mode


S Load part program into memory
S Cycle start on the program

The part program consists of the following:

1. M86 -- Barfeed pressure ON.

2. “ -- Machine component.

3. “

4. “

5. Part--off component.

6. Index turret to Bar stop.

7. Program X and Z axes to within 10mm off the end of Bar.

8. M78 -- Chuck open.

9. Z axis move -- Z move = length of bar.

10. M79 -- Chuck close.

11. Move turret clear.

12. “

13. “

14. “ -- Machine component.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 13--3


Barfeed Spindle Rotation Speed Bits - Keep Relay K Bits
K6.0 SJ_B0 SPINDLE JOG BIT 0 -- BARFEED
K6.1 SJ_B1 SPINDLE JOG BIT 1 -- BARFEED
K6.2 SJ_B2 SPINDLE JOG BIT 2 -- BARFEED
K6.3 SJ_B3 SPINDLE JOG BIT 3 -- BARFEED
K6.4 SJ_B4 SPINDLE JOG BIT 4 -- BARFEED
K6.5 SJ_B5 SPINDLE JOG BIT 5 -- BARFEED
K6.6 SJ_B6 SPINDLE JOG BIT 6 -- BARFEED
K6.7 SJ_B7 SPINDLE JOG BIT 7 -- BARFEED

K6.0 set RPM = 2


K6.0, K6.1 set RPM = 5
K6.0, K6.1, K6.2 set RPM = 11
K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3 set RPM = 22
K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3, K6.4 set RPM = 45
K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3, K6.4, K6.5 set RPM = 92
K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3, K6.4, K6.5, K6.6 set RPM = 186
K6.0, K6.1, K6.2, K6.3, K6.4, K6.5, K6.6, K6.7 set RPM = 370

Page 13--4 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Chapter 14
Reserved Macro Routines
The following macro subroutine numbers are reserved for specific machine
functions.

9020 Barfeed macro--detect end of bar/reload new bar -- Multifeed only.

9011 Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) Semi Manual Tool Setting macro.

9012 Renishaw Tool Setting Arm (TSA) Auto Tool Setting macro

These macros should not be edited or deleted. All other macro subroutine
numbers are available for customer usage.

NOTE: If any macros are accidently erased or edited then the floppy disk
copy as supplied with the machine should be reloaded. Refer to
section on reloading machine software.

Used Macro Variables

Volatile common variables


#100, #101 used by barfeed macro

Non volatile common variables


#509 used by Renishaw TSA macros

#522

#503

#524

#525

#526

#527

#530

#531

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 14--1


Chapter 15
Connection to Data Input/Output Devices
Connection to Data Input and Output Devices

CINCINNATI TURNING CENTRES are supplied with a common input


and output RS232 serial data port located on the front face of control station
housing. The port can be used to interface any RS232 serial data input
output device such as a data printer or remote computer.

Use the following information to prepare the interface:

1. Connector type:-- 25 pin D type plug (female socket is mounted on


machine).

2. Connector pin out details:

Pin No Fanuc Common Signal Input Output


Signal Signal Function Signal Signal
Notation Notation to CNC from CNC
1 FG FG FRAME GROUND
2 SD TD TRANSMITTED DATA "

3 RD RD RECEIVED DATA A

4 RS RTS REQUEST TO SEND "

5 CS CTS CLEAR TO SEND A

6 DR DSR DATA SET READY A

7 SG SG SIGNAL GROUND
8* CD DCD DATA CARRIER DETECT A

20 ER DTR DATA TERMINAL READY "

NOTES: * Always link DCD to DTR on device plug.

3. Input/Output Device Parameters

I/O Channel No of Stop Bits Blankfeed Input/Output Coded Baudrate


selection via selectable 1 or 2 before and after Device Code (bps) of Input/
Parameter 0020 the Data at Data Output Device --
Output selectable selectable
Channel 0 P 101.0 P 101.7 P 102 P 103
(Parameter --
2202 = 0)
Channel 1 P 111.0 P 111.7 P 112 P 113
(Parameter --
0020 = 1)
Parameter 0=(1 stop bit) 0=(Output) Selectable 0--6 1=50 7=600
Settings 1=(2 stop bits) 1=(Not Output) eg: 2=100 8=1200
0=(RS--232--C) 3=110 9=2400
See I/O Device 4=150 10=4800
code table in 5=200 11=9600
this chapter. 6=300 12=19200

For further information refer to GE Fanuc Operator manual.


III Operation, chapter 2.4

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 15--1


Input/Output Device and Code Number

Code Number Input/Output Device


0 RS--232--C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1 (FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3 (FANUC CASSETTE F1)
3 FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adaptor
FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P--MODEL H
4 RS--232--C (Used control codes DC1 to DC4)
5 Portable tape reader
6 FANUC PPR
FANUC SYSTEM P--MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P--MODEL H

For further information refer to the GE Fanuc operator manual.

4. Selection of Input/Output device via parameter 0020

In MDI or Emergency stop state, select OFFSET/SETTING key on


MDI keypad followed by [SETTING] softkey, set PARAMETER
WRITE = 1 and set I/O channel to the required channel number (ie: 0,
1 or 4), then reset PARAMETER WRITE = 0.

I/O Channel 4 (Memory Card)

CINCINNATI VERTICAL MACHINING CENTRES are supplied


with a PCMCIA MEMORY CARD SLOT which is located on the front
face of the control station, and enabled when the I/O CHANNEL
(Parameter 20) is set to 4.

For further information on using the PCMCIA MEMORY CARD


SLOT for data input/output refer to GE Fanuc Operator manual: III
Operation, chapter 8.11.

Page 15--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Chapter 16
Diagnostics

DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE
Lethal voltages are present in the magnetics and electrical
control cabinets when the MACHINE MAIN DISCONNECT
is ’ON’. Current and voltage measurements should be at-
tempted only by qualified electrical maintenance personnel.
Before working on any electrical circuits, turn the machine
Main Disconnect Device ’OFF’ and lock It.
Capacitors in the Servo Drives require up to 20 minutes to
completely discharge. Always verify that discharge is com-
plete using a known working and calibrated voltmeter be-
fore commencing work on these units.
Unless expressly stated in applicable Cincinnati Machine
documentation or by the appropriate Cincinnati Machine
Field Service Representative, do NOT work with electrical
power ’ON’. If such express statement of advice exists,
working with electrical power ’ON’ should be performed by
a Cincinnati Machine Field Service Representative. The
customer and subsequent transferees must determine that
any other person performing work with electrical power ’ON’
is trained and technically qualified.
Failure To Follow This Instruction May Result In Death
Or Serious Personal Shock Injury.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--1


PMC Input Address Reference List

PMC SCHEMATIC FUNCTION


ADDRESS REF

X0004.0 FT_SW CHUCK JAWS FOOT SWITCH


X0004.1 TXT_OK TRANSFORMER TEMPERATURE OK
X0004.2 HYDPRS MACHINE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
X0004.3 QLPRES QUILL HYDRAULIC PRESSURE
X0004.4 H_FLTB HYDRAULIC FILTER BLOCKED
X0004.5 A_LOW TURRET AIR LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
X0004.7 SKIP PROBE SKIP SIGNAL
X0005.0 ALBIT1 TURRET ALARM BIT 1
X0005.1 ALBIT2 TURRET ALARM BIT 2
X0005.2 ALBIT4 TURRET ALARM BIT 4
X0005.3 T_LOCK TURRET LOCKED
X0005.4 T_INDX TURRET INDEXED
X0005.5 T_CRSH TURRET CRASH SWITCH
X0005.6 DR_CLD OPERATOR DOOR CLOSED
X0005.7 DR_LKD OPERATOR DOOR CLOSED & LOCKED
X0006.0 CM_OL COOLANT MOTOR OVERLOAD
X0006.1 HM_OL HYDRAULIC MOTOR OVERLOAD
X0006.2 CON_OL SWARF CONVEYOR MOTOR OVERLOAD
X0006.3 CC_ADV CHUCK CYLINDER ADVANCED
X0006.4 CC_RET CHUCK CYLINDER RETRACTED
X0006.5 X_REF X AXIS REFERENCE SWITCH
X0006.6 Z_REF Z AXIS REFERENCE SWITCH
X0006.7 C_REF C AXIS ALIGN SWITCH
X0007.0 PR_PCA PROXIMITY SWITCH PARTS CATCHER ADVANCED
X0007.1 PR_PCR PROXIMITY SWITCH PARTS CATCHER RETRACTED
X0007.2 EO_BAR BARFEED_END OF BAR SIGNAL
X0007.3 BF_RDY BARFEED READY SIGNAL--MULTIFEED.
AUTO DETECT SIGNAL HYDRAFEED AND
FEEDMASTER
X0007.4 BFMFIN BAR FEED M--CODE FINISH SIGNAL
X0007.5 BF_ALM BAR FEED ALARM
X0007.6 P_EOB BARFEED PRE END OF BAR SIGNAL
X0008.0 M70_FB M70 FEEDBACK SIGNAL
X0008.1 M71_FB M71 FEEDBACK SIGNAL
X0008.2 M72_FB M72 FEEDBACK SIGNAL
X0008.3 M73_FB M73 FEEDBACK SIGNAL
X0008.4 *ESPPB EMERGENCY STOP
X0008.5 P_ACT RENISHAW TSA ACTIVE (DOWN)
X0008.6 P_STOW RENISHAW TSA STOWED (UP)
X0009.1 DT_1SW DRIVEN TOOL ONCE PER POSITION SWITCH
X0009.2 CB_PS C AXIS BRAKE PRESSURE SWITCH
X0009.5 LEV_LK HPA LEVER LOCKED SWITCH
X0009.6 COV_P HPA COVER FITTED SWITCH
X0021.0 *OV1 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 1
X0021.1 *OV2 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 2
X0021.2 *OV4 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 4
X0021.3 *OV8 FEEDRATE OVERRIDE 8
X0021.7 KEY_SW PART PROGRAM PROTECTION KEY
X0023.0 MSTRPB PUSHBUTTON -- MASTER START
X0023.1 CYSRPB REMOTE CYCLE START PUSHBUTTON
X0023.2 PB_JO PUSHBUTTON CHUCK JAWS OPEN
X0023.3 PB_JC PUHSBUTTON CHUCK JAWS CLOSE
X0023.4 PBQADV PUSHBUTTON QUILL ADVANCE
X0023.5 PBQRET PUSHBUTTON QUILL RETRACT

Page 16--2 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


PMC Output Address Reference List
PMC SCHEMATIC FUNCTION
ADDRESS REF

Y0004.0 D_UNLK OPERATOR DOOR SHOTBOLT UNLOCK


Y0004.1 HYD_M HYDRAULIC MOTOR CONTACTOR
Y0004.2 CLT_ON COOLANT PUMP CONTACTOR
Y0004.3 X_BRK X AXIS BRAKE
Y0004.4 SL_JC SOLENOID CHUCK JAWS CLOSE
Y0004.5 SL_JO SOLENOID CHUCK JAWS OPEN
Y0004.6 SL_Q_F SOLENOID QUILL FORWARD
Y0004.7 SL_Q_R SOLENOID QUILL REVERSE
Y0005.0 GREEN MACHINE STATUS BEACON GREEN
Y0005.1 AMBER MACHINE STATUS BEACON AMBER
Y0005.2 RED MACHINE STATUS BEACON RED
Y0005.3 P_MV RENISHAW TSA MOVE SIGNAL
Y0005.4 P_DIR RENISHAW TSA DIRECTION SIGNAL
Y0005.6 CONFWD SWARF CONVEYOR FORWARD
Y0006.0 PBIT01 TURRET POSITION BIT 01
Y0006.1 PBIT02 TURRET POSITION BIT 02
Y0006.2 PBIT04 TURRET POSITION BIT 04
Y0006.3 PBIT08 TURRET POSITION BIT 08
Y0006.4 PARITY TURRET PARITY BIT
Y0006.5 PSTART TURRET START SIGNAL
Y0006.6 PTAB01 NO. TURRET TOOLS 1=12, 0=8
Y0006.7 PTAB02 TURRET INERTIA 0=LOW/1=HIGH
Y0007.0 MODE01 TURRET MODE BIT1
Y0007.1 MODE02 TURRET MODE BIT2
Y0007.2 MODE03 TURRET MODE BIT3
Y0007.7 M02_OP M2/M30 OUTPUT
Y0008.0 M70_OP M70 OUTPUT
Y0008.1 M71_OP M71 OUTPUT
Y0008.2 M72_OP M72 OUTPUT
Y0008.3 M73_OP M73 OUTPUT
Y0008.4 BF_ENB BAR FEED ENABLE
Y0008.5 BF_MCD BAR FEED M CODE
Y0008.6 C_OPEN COLLET OPEN -- BARFEED
Y0008.7 SL_APC SOLENOID ADVANCE PARTS CATCHER
Y0009.0 SR_1 STEADY REST 1 OUTPUT
Y0009.1 SR_2 STEADY REST 2 OUTPUT
Y0009.2 BSOL_1 C AXIS BRAKE SOLENOID 1
Y0009.3 BSOL_2 C AXIS BRAKE SOLENOID 2
Y0009.4 BSOL_3 C AXIS BRAKE SOLENOID 3

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--3


FANUC Operators Panel Connection Signals
The DI/DO signals at the following addresses (PMC) are used exclusively
for the operator’s panel.
PMC address

bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0

X8 *ES
PPB

X20 KD7 KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0

X21 KEY *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1

X22 KST KA3 KA2 KA1 KA0

Y20 LD7 LD6 LD5 LD4 LD3 LD2 LD1 LD0

*ESP X8.4 Emergency Stop Pushbutton


KEY (X21.7) Memory Protect Signal
When Key = 1 Program storage and editing operations etc. can be
performed.
*OV1--*OV8 (X21.0 0-- 21.3) Override Selector Switch Signals
The override codes are input according to the table below.

Rotary switch position *OV8 *OV4 *OV2 *OV1


X21.3 X21.2 X21.1 X21.0
0% 1 1 1 1
10% 1 1 1 0
20% 1 1 0 1
30% 1 1 0 0
40% 1 0 1 1
-- -- -- -- --
-- -- -- -- --
150% 0 0 0 0

(Binary code reverse signal)


KD0 -- KD7 (X20.0) -- 20.7)
KA0 -- KA3 (X22.0 -- 22.3), KST (X22.7)
LDO -- LD7 (Y20.0 -- 20.7)
These signals are processed directly by the controls management software
as coded signals for the key switches and the LEDs. Therefore, they have
no meaningful function to a maintenance engineer.

Page 16--4 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


FANUC Operator Station

Self--Diagnostic Function

Status Display LED

The operators panel PCB (located on the reverse side of the operator’s panel)
is equipped with a green status display LED. It indicates the following
status:

Flashing about every second: Normal


On (Not flashing): Test mode
Other than above: Fault

Test Mode

The operators panel assumes the test mode if the control is turned on while
depressing ’AUTO’ and ’SINGLE BLOCK’ keys at the same time.

As soon as the test mode is active, all LEDs should flash seven times
simultaneously, if any of the keys are depressed thereafter, the LED
corresponding should illuminate.

In the test mode, the depressed key is not transferred to the PMC nor is it
possible to light the LED from the PMC. To finish the test mode, depress
’AUTO’ and ’DRY RUN’ at the same time.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--5


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

A x +
X A1
-- + X
-+X-
B
Z 1
X1 X10
U
X100

C
AUX
1
--Z X +Z

X
--X
D -- 100% +
RS 232

Fig. 62
Operators Control Panel

FANUC Operator Station Key/LED - Diagnostic Address Table

BIT
PCM-- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADDRESS
R292/R242 F3 F2 F1 E1 D1 C1 B1 A1
PROGRAM CYCLE CYCLE PGM DRY SINGLE
STOP STOP START RESTART RUN BLOCK AUTO
R293/R243 F4 E4 E3 E2 D2 C2 B2 A2
SPINDLE TSA PROGRAM BLOCK
CW DOWN TEST DELETE EDIT
R294/R244 D4 D3 C4 C3 B4 B3 A4 A3
SPINDLE TSA TURRET AXIS MPG OPTIONAL ALIGN
DEC UP JOG + INHIBIT X1 STOP (HOME)
MDI
R295/R245 E7 F6 F5 E5 D5 C5 B5 A5
SPINDLE SPINDLE SPINDLE TURRET MPG
CCW STOP 100% JOG -- X10 JOG

R296/R246 F8 E8 E7 E6 D6 C6 B6 A6
COOLANT SPINDLE AUX MPG PARTS
ON INC 1 X100 CATCHER
DOWN
R297/R247 D8 D7 C8 C7 B8 B7 A8 A7
ID PARTS
--Z GRIP CATCHER-
UP
R298/R248 F9 E9 D9 C9 B9 A9
COOLANT RAPID OD
OFF --X TRAVERSE +X GRIP
R299/R249 F10 E10 D10 C10 B10 A10
COOLANT OFFSET
AUTO +Z MEASURE

S Top row in table . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coordinates


S Bottom row in table . . . . . . . . . . Name of key

Page 16--6 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Alarm Messages
Alarm messages are displayed in response to incorrect or missing feedback
signals from the machine and certain part programming errors.

This section describes the meaning of each alarm, the probable reasons for
their occurrence and the recommended alarm recovery procedure in each
case.
All alarms cause the control to enter the alarm status and may invoke various
machine reactions depending upon the severity of the alarm. It is necessary
to depress RESET to cancel an alarm once the fault causing the alarm has
been removed. If the fault is still present then the alarm message remains
displayed.

When the reason for a persistent alarm cannot be determined after following
the alarm recovery procedures then contact Cincinnati Machine Service
department for further advice.

Alarm Number Alarm Message

1000 KEEP RELAYS NOT SET


1001 EMERGENCY STOP
1002 SPINDLE DRIVE ALARM
1003 DRIVEN TOOL ORIENT TIMEOUT
1004 SP2 SPINDLE DRIVE ALARM
1005 SPINDLE ORIENTATION TIMEOUT
1006 SPINDLE ACC/DEC TIMEOUT
1007 SPINDLE DEC TO ZERO TIME
1008 COOLANT MOTOR OVERLOAD
1009 OPERATOR DOOR OPEN
1010 BATTERY LOW KEEP POWER ON
1011 NO T WORD PROGRAMMED -- M76/M77
1012 POWER DOWN CONTROL
1013 OPERATOR PANEL I/O ERR
1014 REMOTE I/O MODULE ERR
1015 DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE ACC/DEC TIMOUT
1016 HYDRAULIC FILTER BLOCKED
1017 MACHINE HYDRAULIC PRESS FAIL
1018 QUILL PRESSURE FAILURE
1019 TRANSFORMER OVERTEMP
1020 CONVEYOR MOTOR OVERLOAD
1021 HYDRAULIC MOTOR OVERLOAD
1022 TURRET OVERLOAD
1023
1024 TURRET SYSTEM ERROR
1025 TURRET CONNECTION ERROR
1026 TURRET UTILISATION ERROR
1027 TURRET UNLOCKING ERROR
1028 TURRET LOCKING ERROR
1029 TURRET REFERENCE ERROR
1030 TURRET INTERFACE ERROR
1031 TURRET CRASH SWITCH ERROR
1032 CHUCK IN UNGRIPPED CONDITION

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--7


1033 INITIALISE ID/OD GRIP
1034 TURRET AIR PRESSURE LOW
1035 INITIALISE CHUCK JAWS
1036 T WORD RANGE ERROR
1037 INITIALISE TAILSTOCK QUILL
1038
1039
1040 PARTS CATCHER ADVANCED TIMEOUT
1041 PARTS CATCHER RETRACTED TIMEOUT
1042 PARTS CATCHER NOT RETRACTED
1043 TOOL SETTING ARM NOT PARKED
1044 TOOL SETTING ARM ADVANCE TIMEOUT
1045 TOOL SETTING ARM RETRACT TIMEOUT
1046
1047 NOT IN MDI MODE
1048 BAR FEED ALARM
1049 BAR FEED NOT IN AUTO MODE
1050 PROBE OPEN
1051 PROBE FAIL
1052 ILLEGAL TOOL OFFSET NUMBER T
1053 ILLEGAL TOOL NOSE VECTOR H
1054 INPUTS C AND H1--H4 MIXED
1055 BROKEN TOOL
1056 MINIMUM TAPPING SPEED 60RPM
1057 M44/M45 INHIBIT -- CHUCK ROTATING
1058 SPINDLE CONTOUR MODE (C AXIS) TIMEOUT
1059 DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE DEC TO ZERO TIMEOUT
1060 SP1 OR SP2 NOT STATIONARY
1061 M78/M79 INHIBIT -- CHUCK ROTATING
1063 TURRET ALIGN FAILURE
1064 TURRET POSITIONING FAILURE
1065 OPEN / CLOSE OPERATOR DOOR
1066 SERVO AXIS ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION
1067 HPA PROTECTIVE COVER NOT FITTED
1068 HPA LEVER NOT IN LOCKED

Page 16--8 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1000

ALARM MESSAGE: KEEP RELAYS NOT SET

MEANING OF ALARM: The keep relay data has not been completed.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. The memory retention system of the control system
has failed.
2. The control memory has been cleared.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: Keep relay data set to Machine Dependant Parameter
sheet as supplied with machine.

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and Spindle Stop


This alarm is unlikely to be seen at any other time than at
control power on.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Set keep relay data to the values as defined on the Machine
Dependant Parameter.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--9


ALARM NUMBER 1001

ALARM MESSAGE: EMERGENCY STOP

MEANING OF ALARM: Emergency Stop push button is depressed.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Emergency Stop push button has not been released. The
Emergency Stop push button latches down when de-
pressed and has to be turned clockwise to unlatch.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: Input X8.4 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Control enters EMG ALM status. Depressing Emergency
Stop push button also initiates a hardware shut down of
axes and spindle drives, and hydraulic unit.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Release Emergency Stop push button.


2. Depress RESET.
3. Realign machine axes and turret mechanism.

Page 16--10 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1002

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE DRIVE ALARM

MEANING OF ALARM: A signal was received from the spindle drive unit indicating
that a spindle drive fault was active.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See ALARM RECOVER PROCEDURE below.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F45.0 is LOW when no fault present.

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine and turn the main disconnect
switch off.
2. After a few seconds turn the main disconnect switch
back on.
3. Restart the machine.
4. If the spindle drive is still in a fault condition power down
the machine, open the drives cabinet and check the
general condition of wiring to and from the spindle drive
and make sure all connections are secure.
5. To properly further diagnose any spindle drive fault it will
be necessary to obtain advice/assistance from Cincin-
nati Machine Service Department.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--11


ALARM NUMBER 1003

ALARM MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL ORIENT TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: A request was made to orientate the Driven Tool spindle but
the orientation complete was not recieved within the allo-
cated time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring to spindle encoder.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G74.6 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F49.7 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 6 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET.


2. If necessary jog the turret into a safe position.
3. Attempt to orienate driven tool spindle using M19code.
4. If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off
main disconnect switch
5. Open electrical cabinate door and check general condi-
tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle motor an-
coder mounted in the back of the driven tool spindle mo-
tor.

Page 16--12 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1004

ALARM MESSAGE: SP2 SPINDLE DRIVE ALARM

MEANING OF ALARM: A signal was received from the Driven Tool spindle drive
unit (sp2) indicating that a spindle drive fault was active.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE below

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F49.0 LOW when no fault present

ALLOWABLE TIME: Insant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down the machine and turn the main disconnect
switch off.
2. After a few seconds turn the main disconnect switch
back on.
3. Restart the machine.
4. If the spindle drive is still in a fault condition, power
down the machine, open the electrical cabinet and
check the general condition of wiring to and from the
spindle drive and make sure all connections are secure.
5. To properly further diagnose any spindle drive fault it will
be necessary to obtain advice/assistance from Cincin-
nati Machine Service Department.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--13


ALARM NUMBER 1005

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE ORIENTATION TIME OUT

MEANING OF ALARM: A request was made to orientate the spindle but the orien-
tation complete signal was not received within the allocated
time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring to spindle encoder.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G70.6 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F45.7 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 6 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET.


2. If necessary jog the machine spindle back into the nor-
mal operating range.
3. Attempt to orientate spindle using M19 code.
4. If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off
main disconnect switch.
5. Open electrical cabinet door and check general condi-
tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle motor en-
coder mounted in the back of the spindle motor.
6. Close electrical cabinet door and power up machine.

Page 16--14 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1006

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE ACC/DEC TIME OUT

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt was made to start the machine spindle or


change the current spindle speed, but the spindle motor up
to speed signal was not received within the prescribed time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring.


2. Faulty spindle drive unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: For CW rotation:-- G70.5 ON, G70.4 OFF


For CCW rotation: G70.4 ON, G70.5 OFF

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F45.3 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 20 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.


2. Retry starting the spindle using M03/4 and S code in
MDI.
3 If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off
main disconnect switch.
4. Open electrical cabinet door and check general condi-
tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle drive unit
and make sure all connections are secure.
5. Close electrical cabinet door and power up machine.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--15


ALARM NUMBER 1007

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE DEC TO ZERO TIME

MEANING OF ALARM: A spindle stop request was issued to the spindle drive but
the spindle zero speed input was not received within the
prescribed time. Can also occur even if spindle is station-
ary as spindle zero speed status is assumed when spindle
is not in use.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring.


2. Faulty spindle drive unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G70.5 and G70.4 LOW

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F45.1 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 12 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.


2. Retry stopping and starting spindle in MDI mode.
3. If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off
main disconnect switch.
4. Open electrical cabinet door and check general condi-
tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle drive unit
and make sure all connections are secure.
5. Close cabinet door and power up machine.

Page 16--16 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1008

ALARM MESSAGE: COOLANT MOTOR OVERLOAD

MEANING OF ALARM: The electrical overload unit used to protect the coolant
pump motor has tripped out.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. The coolant pump intake mesh is contaminated.
2. Faulty coolant motor.
3. Faulty overload signal wiring.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X6.0 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine and turn main disconnect switch
off.
2. Open electrical door and reset the coolant motor over-
load unit.
3. Check if anything is blocking the coolant pump intake
mesh.
4. Close electrical cabinet door and power up machine.
5. If the coolant overload retrips when the coolant is
turned on it will be necessary to remove the motor and
check for contaminants beyond the filter mesh and the
condition of the motor windings.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--17


ALARM NUMBER 1009

ALARM MESSAGE: OPERATOR DOOR OPEN

MEANING OF ALARM: The OPERATOR DOOR CLOSED AND LOCKED switch


signal was not received within the prescribed time when
attempting to invoke an activation that required the opera-
tor doors to be electrically locked. Alternatively the OPER-
ATOR DOOR LOCKED switch signal was lost during the
machine cycle or while the spindle was rotating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Operator door not fully closed restricting the door lock-
ing bolt from correctly inserting into the door latch.
2. Faulty opto--isolator output module.
3. Operator door opened during cycle or while the spindle
was rotating.
4. Faulty wiring.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: Y4.0 LOW

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.6 HIGH and X5.7 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 0.25 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.


2. Open and close operator doors and attempt to restart
the machine cycle.
3. If the alarm is reactivated monitor the door switch in the
STATUS display.
4. If the switch is not functioning correctly check the condi-
tion of the wiring to and from the switches.
5. Check the condition of the relevant door unlock opto--
isolator module.

Page 16--18 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1010

ALARM MESSAGE: BATTERY LOW KEEP POWER ON

MEANING OF ALARM: The voltage of the control memory retention batteries


dropped below the minimum permitted level.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Batteries need replacing.


2. Faulty wiring from batteries to control unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: N/A

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Alarm 1010 will not be reported until the current machine
cycle is complete. However the BAT alarm status may be
displayed while the machine is in cycle. Any attempt to re-
start the machine cycle while this alarm is active will be re-
jected.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Refer to battery replacement procedure in GE Fanuc


Operator Manual, IV Maintenance, chapter 1 immedi-
ately.
2. If the alarm still persists check the condition of the wiring
from the battery housing to the control unit.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--19


ALARM NUMBER 1011

ALARM MESSAGE: NO T WORD PROGRAMMED -- M76/M77

MEANING OF ALARM: No T word has been programmed on a block with an M76


or M77.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming error.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.


2. Edit program to include a T word.
3. Restart program at a convenient/safe point.

Page 16--20 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1012

ALARM MESSAGE: POWER DOWN CONTROL

MEANING OF ALARM: The X--axis has been selected for jog or handwheel before
the machine is aligned.
This alarm is posted to prevent an incorrect alignment on
the X--axis.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Jogging axes away from chuck/part before alignment.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Error posted -- power up inhibited.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down control.


2. Power back up control.
3. Align machine as normal.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--21


ALARM NUMBER 1013

ALARM MESSAGE: OPERATOR PANEL I/O ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: A fault has occurred on the operator panel I/O.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty operator panel.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X35 ‡00000000

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check wiring to operator panel I/O.


2. Replace operator panel.

Page 16--22 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1014

ALARM MESSAGE: REMOTE I/O MODULE ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: A fault has occurred on one of the remote I/O modules.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty I/O module.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X19 ‡00000000

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check wiring to remote I/O modules.


2. Replace suspect remote I/O module.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--23


ALARM NUMBER 1015

ALARM MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE ACC/DEC TIMOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt was made to start the machine spindle or


change the current spindle speed, but the spindle motor up
to speed signal was not received within the specified time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring.


2. Faulty spindle drive (sp2) unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: For CW rotation:-- G74.4 HIGH, G74.5 LOW


For CCW rotation:-- G74.4 LOW, G74.5 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F45.3 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 20 seconds.

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress reset to cancel the alarm.


2. Retry starting the spindle using M03/4 and S code in
MDI.
3. If alarm persists power down machine and turn off main
disconnect switch.
4. Open the electrical cabinet and check the general con-
dition of wiring to and from the spindle drive and make
sure all connections are secure.
5. If fault persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/as-
sistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Department.

Page 16--24 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1016

ALARM MESSAGE: HYDRAULIC FILTER BLOCKED

MEANING OF ALARM: The hydraulic filter is blocked.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Dirty hydraulic filter.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X4.4 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down control/machine (isolator off).


2. Refer to service manual for replacement of hydraulic
filter.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--25


ALARM NUMBER 1017

ALARM MESSAGE: MACHINE HYDRAULIC PRESS FAIL

MEANING OF ALARM: The hydraulic pressure switch has detected a failure.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Low fluid level in hydraulic tank.


2. Damaged hydraulic hose.
3. Hydraulic pump failure.
4. Defective or incorrectly adjusted hydraulic oil pressure
switch.
5. Wiring problem.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X4.2 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 10 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/hydraulics off (E--Stop condition).

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check all of the above reasons for alarm -- correct as nec-
essary.
Machine power off (isolator off) to check wiring/hydraulic
pump.

Page 16--26 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1018

ALARM MESSAGE: QUILL PRESSURE FAILURE

MEANING OF ALARM: The quill pressure switch signal was lost with the quill ad-
vanced while in cycle.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Defective or incorrectly adjusted quill pressure switch.
2. Damaged hydraulic hose.
3. Wiring problem.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X4.3 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check all of the above reasons for alarm -- correct as nec-
essary.
Machine power off (isolator off) to check wiring/hydraulic
hoses.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--27


ALARM NUMBER 1019

ALARM MESSAGE: TRANSFORMER OVERTEMP.

MEANING OF ALARM: The main auto transformer is overheating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Excessive loading of the machine.


2. Incorrect supply voltage.
3. Faulty transformer thermistor.
4. Faulty machine wiring.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X4.1 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold, spindle stop at the end of the current NC ma-
chine cycle.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check that the current NC cycle is not overloading the
machine.
2. Check that the incoming supply voltage to the machine
is within specification.
3. Let the transformer cool down to see if the alarm can be
reset.
4. If the fault is still present when the transformer has
cooled down, then check the condition of the wiring and
the function of the transformer thermistor.

Page 16--28 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1020

ALARM MESSAGE: CONVEYOR MOTOR OVERLOAD

MEANING OF ALARM: The conveyor motor overload has ’tripped’ due to an over-
load condition.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Swarf conveyor jammed with excessive swarf.
2. Defective swarf conveyor motor.
3. Defective circuit breaker.
4. Wiring problem.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X6.2 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check all of the above reasons for alarm -- correct as nec-
essary.
Machine power off (isolator off) to check circuit breaker/wir-
ing.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--29


ALARM NUMBER 1021

ALARM MESSAGE: HYDRAULIC MOTOR OVERLOAD

MEANING OF ALARM: The hydraulic motor circuit breaker has ’tripped’ due to an
overload condition.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Excessive motor load due to high hydraulic pressure
2. Defective hydraulic pump motor.
3. Defective circuit breaker.
4. Wiring problem.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X6.1 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Hydraulics off -- feedhold (E--Stop condition)

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check all of the above reasons for alarm -- correct as nec-
essary.
Machine power off (isolator off) to check circuit breaker/wir-
ing/pump--motor combination.

Page 16--30 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1022

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET OVERLOAD

MEANING OF ALARM: The electrical overload unit to protect the turret unit has
tripped out.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty overload wiring.


2. Faulty turret unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X6.7 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and Spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine and turn main disconnect off .
2. Open electrical cabinet door and reset the Turret over-
load unit.
3. Close electrical cabinet and power up machine.
4. If the overload re--trips when a turret move is requested
-- it will be necessary to check the wiring of the turret
unit. -- refer to turret manual supplied with the machine.
5. If fault persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/as-
sistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Department.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--31


ALARM NUMBER 1024

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET SYSTEM ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has issued a system error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Faulty supply voltage to turret unit due to:--
1. Faulty circuit breaker.
2. Faulty supply to circuit breaker.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/spdl stop -- turret alignment is lost.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check the following:--


1. Turret circuit breaker operation.
2. Check supply to circuit breaker and turret.
3. Refer to turret maintenance manual supplied.
4. Power down/power back up machine -- if fault persists
contact Cincinnati Machine Field service.

Page 16--32 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1025

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET CONNECTION ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has issued an over voltage alert.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Faulty supply voltage to turret.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/spdl stop -- turret alignment is lost.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Check the following:--


1. Check supply voltage to turret.
2. Power down/power back up machine -- if fault persists
contact Cincinnati Machine Field service.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--33


ALARM NUMBER 1026

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET UTILISATION ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted a utilisation error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Over current.


2. Servo error.
3. Thermal detector in turret.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/spdl stop -- turret alignment is lost.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Refer to turret maintenance supplied.


2. Power down machine -- power back up. If fault persists
contact Cincinnati Machine Field Service.

Page 16--34 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1027

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET UNLOCKING ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted an unlocking (unclamping) er-
ror.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Unlocking (unclamping) Switch fault.


2. Unlocking (unclamping) Switch setting.
3. Air supply fault.
4. Wiring fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOW


X5.3 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/spdl stop -- turret alignment is lost.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check Air supply to unit -- pressure should be 5 Bar.
2. Refer to turret maintenance manual supplied.
3. Power down/power back up machine. If fault persists
contact Cincinnati Machine Field Service.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--35


ALARM NUMBER 1028

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET LOCKING ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted a locking (clamping) error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Locking (clamping) Switch fault.


2. Locking (clamping) Switch setting.
3. Air supply fault.
4. Wiring fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOW


X5.3 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/spdl stop -- turret alignment is lost.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check Air supply to unit -- pressure should be 5 Bar.
2. Refer to turret maintenance manual supplied.
3. Power down/power back up machine. If fault persists
contact Cincinnati Machine Field Service.

Page 16--36 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1029

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET REFERENCE ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted a reference error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Reference Switch fault.


2. Reference Switch setting.
3. Air supply fault.
4. Wiring fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/spdl stop -- turret alignment is lost.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check Air supply to unit -- pressure should be 5 Bar.
2. Refer to turret maintenance manual supplied.
3. Power down/power back up machine. If fault persists
contact Cincinnati Machine Field Service.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--37


ALARM NUMBER 1030

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET INTERFACE ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The Turret Unit has posted an interface error.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Zero search (ref) missed.


2. Position code error.
3. Units servo timeout.
4. PSTART signal timeout.
5. Wiring problem.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.0, X5.1 and X5.2 all LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold/spdl stop -- turret alignment is lost.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check wiring of every signal to the unit.


2. Refer to turret maintenance manual supplied.
3. Power down/power back up machine. If fault persists
contact Cincinnati Machine Field Service.

Page 16--38 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1031

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET CRASH SWITCH ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: The turret has been knocked out of position causing an E--
Stop condition.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Machine crash due to programming/operator fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.5 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Emergency Stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Refer to service manual for a procedure of how to mechani-
cally re--align the turret.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--39


ALARM NUMBER 1032

ALARM MESSAGE: CHUCK IN UNGRIPPED CONDITION

MEANING OF ALARM: The chuck jaws are in an ungripped condition, when in


cycle or when a cycle start is attempted.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. No component in chuck.


2. Chuck jaws not gripping component properly.
3. Cylinder switch fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X6.3 and X6.4 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop. Cycle start inhibited.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Check status of ID/OD Grip selection.
3. Using open/close chuck pushbuttons, check operation
of chuck jaws.
4. Check operation of cylinder advance retract switches.

Page 16--40 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1033

ALARM MESSAGE: INITIALISE ID/OD GRIP

MEANING OF ALARM: On power up ID or OD grip is not selected for the chuck.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See above.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Select ID or OD grip pushbutton.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--41


ALARM NUMBER 1034

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET AIR PRESSURE LOW

MEANING OF ALARM: The main air supply to the machine went below the lower
limit of 5 bar.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. The air supply to the machine has been turned off either
at the source of air supply or at the machine air regulator
valve.
2. An air line on the machine has become disconnected or
damaged.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X4.5 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and Spindle Stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Reinstate air supply.


2., Depress RESET to cancel alarm.
3. Re--align Turret.

Page 16--42 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1036

ALARM MESSAGE: T WORD RANGE ERROR

MEANING OF ALARM: A T word has been programmed which is greater than the
number of Turret stations available.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and Spindle Stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Correct fault in part program.
3. Restart part program.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--43


ALARM NUMBER 1037

ALARM MESSAGE: INITIALISE TAILSTOCK QUILL

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to cycle start with the quill either
not fully advanced or not fully retracted.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Quill not advanced due to step advance being used in
set up.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold -- cycle start inhibited.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Advance or retract tailstock quill using pushbuttons.
3. Resume part program execution.

Page 16--44 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1040

ALARM MESSAGE: PARTS CATCHER ADVANCED TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: The parts catcher has not advanced to its forward (collect)
position in the available time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Wiring fault.


2. Faulty solenoid.
3. Faulty advanced proximity switch.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: Y8.7 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X7.0 HIGH X7.1 LOW (2 switch parts catcher)
X7.1 HIGH (1 switch parts catcher)

ALLOWABLE TIME: 8 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Using the parts catcher advance and retract push
buttons advance and retract the parts catcher and
monitor the switch and solenoid states.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--45


ALARM NUMBER 1041

ALARM MESSAGE: PARTS CATCHER RETRACTED TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: The parts catcher has not retracted to its parked position in
the available time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Wiring fault.


2. Faulty solenoid.
3. Faulty retract proximity switch.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: Y8.7 LOW

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X7.0 LOW


X7.1 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 8 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Using the parts catcher advance and retract push
buttons advance and retract the parts catcher and
monitor the switch and solenoid states.

Page 16--46 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1042

ALARM MESSAGE: PARTS CATCHER NOT RETRACTED

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to move the Renishaw Tool Set-
ting Arm (TSA) with the parts catcher not retracted.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Operator error

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X7.1 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Jog parts catcher to its parked position with pushbutton.
2. Proceed to move the TSA as required.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--47


ALARM NUMBER 1043

ALARM MESSAGE: TOOL SETTING ARM NOT PARKED

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to move the parts catcher or
start the spindle via M--codes with the Renishaw Tool Set-
ting Arm (TSA) not parked.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Operator error

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Jog TSA to its parked position with the pushbutton.
2. Proceed to move parts catcher as required.

Page 16--48 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1044

ALARM MESSAGE: TOOL SETTING ARM ADVANCE TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: The TSA has not advanced (to its active down position)
within the allowable time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Wiring fault.


2. Faulty TSA unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: Y5.4 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X8.5 LOW


X8.6 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 10 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Using the pushbuttons advance and retract the TSA
and monitor switch states.
3. Refer to TSA manual if fault persists.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--49


ALARM NUMBER 1045

ALARM MESSAGE: TOOL SETTING ARM RETRACT TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: The TSA has not retracted (to its parked -- stowed position)
within the allowable time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Wiring fault.


2. Faulty TSA unit.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: Y5.4 LOW

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X8.5 HIGH


X8.6 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: 10 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Using the pushbuttons advance and retract the TSA
and monitor switch states.
3. Refer to TSA manual if fault persists.

Page 16--50 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1047

ALARM MESSAGE: NOT IN MDI MODE

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program M74, M75, M90 or
M91 M--codes in auto mode instead of MDI.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Operator error.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Change mode to MDI and re--program M--codes.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--51


ALARM NUMBER 1048

ALARM MESSAGE: BAR FEED ALARM

MEANING OF ALARM: Multifeed unit -- out of bars.


Hydrafeed and Feedmaster -- end of bar signal

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Out of bars

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: Multifeed -- X7.5 LOW


Hydrafeed and Feedmaster -- X7.2 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Reload bars to Barfeed unit.
3. Resume cycle.

Page 16--52 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1049

ALARM MESSAGE: BAR FEED NOT IN AUTO MODE

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to cycle start with the barfeed
not in auto mode.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Barfeed unit not in automatic (auto) mode.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X7.3 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold -- cycle start inhibited.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key.


2. Place barfeed unit in auto mode.
3. Resume NC cycle as required.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--53


ALARM NUMBER 1050

ALARM MESSAGE: PROBE OPEN

MEANING OF ALARM: The ’probe open’ alarm is raised when the stylus is in con-
tact with the surface before the skip move begins.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Probe error


2. Programming fault

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS:

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS:

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Return to reference and edit the part program.
2. If the stylus remains in an ’open’ (triggered) condition
during any part of the cycle, the ’probe open’ alarm is
raised. Check that the stylus is not in contact with the
surface or check to see whether vibration is causing it
to unseat during a move.
3. The alarm may also be raised at the start of a macro if
the probe system is in error, (a probe open signal condi-
tion is forced by the Renishaw interface).
4. Check to make sure that the probe system is switched
on in time before a skip move begins. A program dwell
may be required.
5. Check that the status LED on the interface is changing
state when the stylus is deflected. If this does not hap-
pen contact the supplier of the system for assistance.

Page 16--54 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1051

ALARM MESSAGE: PROBE FAIL

MEANING OF ALARM: The alarm ’probe fail’ is raised when the expected surface
is not contacted within the overtravel of the probe.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Probe fault


2. Programming fault

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS:

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS:

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check the program and edit where necessary.
2. Check that the probe stylus has been calibrated on the
machine.
3. Check that the status LED on the interface is changing
state when the stylus is deflected. If this does not hap-
pen contact the supplier of the system for assistance.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--55


ALARM NUMBER 1052

ALARM MESSAGE: ILLEGAL TOOL OFFSET NUMBER T

MEANING OF ALARM: Tool offset ’T0’ is not allowed. If using the ’T’ input on the
cycle call line, check the value is not (0) zero, otherwise this
alarm may occur if no tool or tool offset was selected in the
MDI mode before running the cycle.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: T0 programmed

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS:

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS:

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: Caution: Make sure the turret is safely away from the
probe stylus before indexing the turret.
1. Edit the program input value or select the tool in MDI
before running the cycle again.

Page 16--56 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1053

ALARM MESSAGE: ILLEGAL TOOL NOSE VECTOR H

MEANING OF ALARM: Only vector numbers 1 to 8 are allowed.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Programming fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS:

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS:

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Check and correct the ’H’ input if used, or the ’T’
address on the tool offset page.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--57


ALARM NUMBER 1054

ALARM MESSAGE: INPUTS C AND H1--H4 MIXED

MEANING OF ALARM: It is not possible to set a cutter using the ’C’ input with a cor-
ner vector H1--H4 specified. Edit the program.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Programming fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS:

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS:

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Edit/correct program.

Page 16--58 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1055

ALARM MESSAGE: BROKEN TOOL

MEANING OF ALARM: This alarm is generated when the tool length error exceeds
the programmed Mm tolerance. When the value is pro-
grammed it must be half the total tolerance (see examples).

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Broken/damaged tool

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS:

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS:

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Replace broken/damaged tool

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--59


ALARM NUMBER 1056

ALARM MESSAGE: MINIMUM TAPPING SPEED 60 RPM

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program a tapping speed


greater than 60 rpm.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Programming fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the reset key.


2. Correct fault in part program.
3. Restart the part program.

Page 16--60 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1057

ALARM MESSAGE: M44/M45 INHIBIT -- CHUCK ROTATING

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program an M44 -- TSA UP


or an M45 -- TSA DOWN with the chuck rotating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Programming fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the reset key.


2. Correct fault in part program.
3. Restart the part program.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--61


ALARM NUMBER 1058

ALARM MESSAGE: SPINDLE CONTOUR MODE (C AXIS) TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to go into C AXIS mode (pro-
gramming M51) but the acknowledgement signal has not
been received within the allowable time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring to spindle encoder


2. Faulty spindle drive -- SP1

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G27.7 HIGH

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F44.1 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 5 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET.


2. Attempt to program M51 again.
3. If alarm still persists power down machine and turn off
main disconnect switch.
4. Open electrical cabinet door and check general condi-
tion of machine wiring to and from the spindle motor an-
coder mounted in the back of the spindle motor.
5. To properly further diagnose any spindle drive fault it will
be necessary to obtain advice/assistance from Cincin-
nati Machine Service Department.

Page 16--62 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1059

ALARM MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE DEC TO ZERO TIMEOUT

MEANING OF ALARM: A spindle stop request was issued to the spindle drive --
SP2 -- Driven Tool -- but the spindle zero speed input was
not received within the prescribed time. Can also occur
even if spindle is stationary as spindle zero speed status is
assumed when the spindle is not in use.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Faulty wiring to spindle encoder


2. Faulty spindle drive -- SP2

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G74.5 and G74.4 LOW

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F49.1 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 12 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Depress RESET to cancel alarm.


2. Retry stopping and starting driven tool spindle in MDI
mode.
3. If the alarm still persists power down machine and turn
the main disconnect switch off.
4. Open electrical cabinet and check the general condi-
tion of wiring to and from the spindle drive -- SP2 --and
make sure all connections are secure.
5. If fault still persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/
assistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Depart-
ment.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--63


ALARM NUMBER 1060

ALARM MESSAGE: SP1 OR SP2 NOT STATIONARY

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program an M51 -- C Axis


mode ON or an M50 -- C axis mode OFF -- with either the
chuck or driven tool spindle rotating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming fault

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: G70.5, G70.4, G74.4 and G74.5 LOW

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F 45.1 and F49.1 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the RESET key.


2. Correct fault in part program.
3. Restart the part program.

Page 16--64 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1061

ALARM MESSAGE: M78/M79 INHIBIT -- CHUCK ROTATING

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to program an M78 -- Release


Chuck Jaws or an M79 -- Grip Chuck Jaws, with the chuck
rotating.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming fault

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the RESET key.


2. Correct fault in part program.
3. Restart the part program.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--65


ALARM NUMBER 1062

ALARM MESSAGE: UNEXPECTED HIT

MEANING OF ALARM: The Toolsitting Arm stylus (either TSA or HPA) has been
triggered while not in a probing cycle.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Programming fault


2. Setup problem.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X4.7 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press the RESET key.


2. Jog the axes away from the stylus.
3. Correct fault in part program/setup.
4. It may be necessary to reset the alignment of the stylus.
5. Restart the part program.

Page 16--66 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1063

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET ALIGN FAILURE

MEANING OF ALARM: The turret has failed to align with the specified time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE below.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.3 and X5.4 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: 10 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine, power back up and attempt to
align the turret again.
2. If fault persists power down the machine and turn the
main disconnect switch off.
3. Check all wiring to turret -- refer to electrical schematics.
4. If fault still persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/
assistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Depart-
ment.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--67


ALARM NUMBER 1064

ALARM MESSAGE: TURRET POSITIONING FAILURE

MEANING OF ALARM: The turret has failed to move within the specified time.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: See ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE below.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X5.3 and X5.4 HIGH after turret move

ALLOWABLE TIME: 10 seconds

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Power down machine, power back up and attempt to
move the turret again.
2. If fault persists power down the machine and turn the
main disconnect switch off.
3. Check all electrical wiring to the turret. Fault can occur
if there is a wiring fault with the turret Mode01, Mode02
or Mode03 Outputs -- refer to electrical schemes and
turret manual supplied with this machine.
4. If fault still persists it will be necessary to obtain advice/
assistance from Cincinnati Machine Service Depart-
ment.

Page 16--68 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1065

ALARM MESSAGE: OPEN / CLOSE OPERATOR DOOR

MEANING OF ALARM: After a part program has been completed it is necessary to


open and close the operator door before the program can
be run again.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: Operator door has not been opened / closed after the end
of program.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: N/A

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET key to clear alarm.


2. Open and then close the operator door.
3. Cycle start will take the machine back into cycle.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--69


ALARM NUMBER 1066

ALARM MESSAGE: SERVO AXIS ABNORMAL LOAD DETECTION

MEANING OF ALARM: The axis load detection feature has determined an exces-
sive axis load.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Excessive cut.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: F90.0 LOW

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Emergency Stop of axes and spindle.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Re--apply power to axes drives.


2. Re--align machine if necessary.
3. Examine part program and workpiece with a view to re-
ducing depth of cut.

Page 16--70 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


ALARM NUMBER 1067

ALARM MESSAGE: HPA PROTECTIVE COVER NOT FITTED

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to either:--


1. Align the machine.
2. Rotate the chuck via spindle start M--Codes.
3. Jog the chuck with the JOG keys.
4. Move the parts catcher, if one is fitted, by push buttons
or M--Codes.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. HPA protective cover not in place.


2. Wiring fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X9.5 and X9.6 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET to clear alarm.


2. Fit the protective cover and lock the lever by turning it
clockwise.
3. If fault still persists, power down the machine and turn
off at the main disconnect switch.
4. Open the electrical cabinet and check the general con-
dition of wiring to and from the HPA probe assembly.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--71


ALARM NUMBER 1068

ALARM MESSAGE: HPA LEVER NOT IN LOCKED POSITION

MEANING OF ALARM: An attempt has been made to either:--


1. Go into NC cycle -- via Cycle Start push button.
2. Jog the turret via the Turret Jog push buttons
With the HPA lever not in its locked position.

PROBABLE REASONS FOR ALARM: 1. Lever not in locked position


2. Wiring fault.

CORRECT OUTPUT STATUS: N/A

CORRECT INPUT/FEEDBACK STATUS: X9.5 HIGH

ALLOWABLE TIME: Instant

CONTROL REACTION TO ALARM: Feedhold and spindle stop.

ALARM RECOVERY PROCEDURE: 1. Press RESET to clear alarm.


2. Lock the lever by turning it clockwise.
3. If fault still persists, power down the machine and turn
off at the main disconnect switch.
4. Open the electrical cabinet and check the general con-
dition of wiring to and from the HPA probe assembly.

Page 16--72 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


Operator Messages
Operator messages are displayed in response to various illegal commands
or to indicate that the machine is waiting for operator intervention.

These messages do not cause the control to enter the alarm status, and are
mainly automatically cleared when the condition causing the message has
been removed.

1000 HR SERVICE -- LUBE


2 HAND CONTROL -- USE AUX 1 PUSHBUTTON
ALIGN AXES FIRST
ALIGN TURRET
CHUCK ROTATING
DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE NOT ORIENTATED PRESS HOME PB
TO ORIENTATE SPINDLE AND REFERENCE TURRET
DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE ROTATING
DRY RUN ACTIVE REPRESS
FUNCTION NOT SUPPORTED
HPA FITTED -- RETRACT Z TO HIGH LIMIT TO MOVE TURRET
MACHINE NOT ALIGNED
NOT IN AUTO OR MDI MODE
OPEN OPERATOR DOOR FIRST
OPERATOR DOOR NOT CLOSED
PARTS COUNT = PRESET
PRESS HOME PB TO ALIGN TURRET
PROGRAM STOP M00 OR M01
RESTART SPINDLE FIRST
SPINDLE OVERLOAD
TURRET NOT ALIGNED
USE CCW KEY TO RESTART
USE CW KEY TO RESTART
USE MPG HANDWHEEL X1 MACHINE UNALIGNED
X AND Z REF SW TO ALIGN TURRET

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--73


MESSAGE: 1000 HOUR SERVICE REQUEST -- LUBRICATE AXES
WAYS

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: This message is displayed every 1000 hours that the ma-
chine power is on. It is a reminder to the operator to carry
out routine machine maintenance, i.e. to relubricate the
machine axes ways.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Lubricate the machine axes ways by referring to the service
TO MESSAGE: manual as supplied with the machine.

Depress the RESET pushbutton to clear message display.

MESSAGE: 2 HAND CONTROL -- USE AUX 1 PUSHBUTTON

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt has been made to jog the turret without press-
ing the AUX 1 pushbutton.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Press the AUX 1 pushbutton in conjunction with the ap-
TO MESSAGE: propriate Turret Jog pushbutton.

Page 16--74 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


MESSAGE: ALIGN AXES FIRST

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to jog a mechanism before the ma-
chine axes were aligned.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Align machine axes.


TO MESSAGE:

MESSAGE: ALIGN TURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to cycle start without first aligning the
turret.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Align turret with home pushbutton key.


TO MESSAGE:

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--75


MESSAGE: CHUCK ROTATING

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to jog the Renishaw TSA up or down
via pushbuttons with the chuck rotating.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Stop the chuck rotation before attempting to move the TSA.
TO MESSAGE:

MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE NOT ORIENTATED -- PRESS


HOME PB TO ORIENTATE SPINDLE AND REFERENCE
TURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: After successful axis align this message is displayed.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Pressing the Home pushbutton will orientate the driven tool
TO MESSAGE: spindle and then position the turret to station 1.

Page 16--76 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


MESSAGE: DRIVEN TOOL SPINDLE ROTATING

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to jog the turret with the driven tool
spindle rotating.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Stop the driven tool spindle before attempting to jog the tur-
TO MESSAGE: ret.

MESSAGE: DRY RUN ACTIVE REPRESS

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to restart the machine cycle in DRY
RUN mode. For safety reasons the first press of the
CYCLE START pushbutton in DRY RUN mode only dis-
plays the DRY RUN ACTIVE REPRESS message. Ma-
chine cycle is then started on the next press of the CYCLE
START.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Acknowledge that DRY RUN is active and required then re-
TO MESSAGE: press CYCLE START pushbutton.

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--77


MESSAGE: FUNCTION NOT SUPPORTED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to use a control function that is either
not supported or has not been installed.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION None


TO MESSAGE:

MESSAGE: HPA FITTED -- RETRACT Z TO HIGH LIMIT TO MOVE


TURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to jog the turret with the HPA fitted
and the Z axis not at its high limit.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Jog Z axis to high limit to allow turret movement.
TO MESSAGE:

Page 16--78 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


MESSAGE: MACHINE NOT ALIGNED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to cycle start with either the axes not
aligned or the turret not aligned.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Align axes and/or turret


TO MESSAGE:

MESSAGE: NOT IN AUTO OR MDI MODE

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to start the machine cycle while not
in either AUTO or MDI mode.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Select AUTO or MDI mode


TO MESSAGE:

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--79


MESSAGE: OPEN OPERATOR DOOR FIRST

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to:


a) Open the chuck jaws.
b) Close the chuck jaws.
c) Retract the tailstock quill with the operator door closed.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Open operator door.


TO MESSAGE:

MESSAGE: OPERATOR DOOR NOT CLOSED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to:--


a) Restart the spindle.
b) Jog the spindle.
c) Jog the parts catcher.
d) Align the axes
without the operator access doors being fully closed.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Check that the operator access doors are fully closed and
TO MESSAGE: reattempt operation.

Page 16--80 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


MESSAGE: PARTS COUNT = PRESET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: The optional parts counter facility is indicating that the
PART COUNT is equal to the preset PARTS REQUIRED
value.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION 1. Depress RESET to cancel message and then reset the
TO MESSAGE: PART COUNT to zero.
2. Reset quantity of parts required to new batch size if
necessary or disable parts counter by setting quantity
of parts required to zero.

MESSAGE: PRESS HOME PB TO ALIGN TURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: After successful axis align this message is displayed.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes -- after turret has aligned

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Press HOME pushbutton to align turret


TO MESSAGE:

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--81


MESSAGE: PROGRAM STOP M00 or M0I

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: 1. An M00 program stop code was encountered.
2. An M01 optional stop code was encountered while the
optional stop feature was enabled.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION 1. Open operator door to perform action required during
TO MESSAGE: program stop; inspection of part, removal of excess
swarf etc.
2. Depress CYCLE START to restart the machine cycle
and cancel the PROGRAM STOP message.
Note: Coolant and spindle are automatically restarted
if previously active.

MESSAGE: RESTART SPINDLE FIRST

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to restart the machine cycle without
first restarting the spindle. Spindle rotation had previously
been stopped using the SPDL STOP pushbutton.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Restart the machine spindle using either the SPDL CW or
TO MESSAGE: SPDL CCW pushbutton depending on the spindle direction
which was previously active.

Page 16--82 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


MESSAGE: SPINDLE OVERLOAD

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: The spindle drive load limit signal was received from the
spindle drive unit.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Note: In the event of a SPINDLE OVERLOAD the machine
TO MESSAGE: enters a FEEDHOLD condition but the spindle is not
stopped.
To recover from this condition adopt the following proce-
dure:
1. Turn the feedrate override selector to 10%.
2. Depress CYCLE START. This cancels the SPINDLE
OVERLOAD message and restarts the machine cycle.
3. Increase the feedrate override but to a rate lower than
that likely to retrip the spindle drive load limit.
4. Finally edit the part program feedrates to prevent recur-
rences of SPINDLE OVERLOAD on subsequent
cycles.

MESSAGE: TURRET NOT ALIGNED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to start NC cycle with the turret not
aligned.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Align turret.


TO MESSAGE:

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--83


MESSAGE: USE CCW KEY TO RESTART

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to restart the machine spindle using
the SPDL CW pushbutton when previously the spindle had
been stopped via the SPDL STOP pushbutton while rotat-
ing in the counter clockwise direction.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Depress the SPDL CCW pushbutton to restart the machine
TO MESSAGE: spindle.

MESSAGE: USE CW KEY TO RESTART

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to restart the machine spindle using
the SPDL CCW pushbutton when previously the spindle
had been stopped via the SPDL STOP pushbutton while ro-
tating in the clockwise direction.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Depress the SPDL CW pushbutton to restart the machine
TO MESSAGE: spindle.

Page 16--84 Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001


MESSAGE: USE MPG HANDWHEEL X1 MACHINE UNALIGNED

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt has been made to jog or handwheel the axes
(with X10 or X100 increments) before the axes/machine
are aligned.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: Yes

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Select X1 handwheel increment and move axes if desired.
TO MESSAGE:

MESSAGE: X AND Z REF SW TO ALIGN TURRET

REASONS FOR MESSAGE DISPLAY: An attempt was made to align the turret with the X and Z
axes not in their reference switches.

MESSAGE SELF CANCELLING: No

TYPICAL OPERATOR REACTION Jog X and Z axes to their positive limits.


TO MESSAGE:

Cincinnati Machine 91203597B001 Page 16--85


Index

A D
Alarm Messages, 16--7 Diagnostics, 16--1
Auto Tool Setting -- Macro O9012 -- TSA Only, 11--15 Disconnect Switch, 3--16
Auto Tool Setting -- TSA only, 11--3 Driven Tool Machines, 8--1, 9--1
Axis, orientation, 2--6
axis, overtravel, 1--25 E
Electrical, Isolation Device, 1--24
B EMC Directive Requirements, 2--4
Barfeed Spindle Rotation Speed Bits -- Keep Relay K Emergency Stop, Push Button, 1--24
Bits, 13--4 Eyebolts, 1--7
Barfeeder, 13--1 Inch, 1--7
Bar Preparation, 13--1 Metric, 1--8
M--Codes, 13--1
Standard Barfeed Sequence for Hydrafeed and
Feedmaster, 13--3 F
Standard Barfeed Sequence for Multifeed Unit,
13--2 FANUC Operator Station, 16--5
Diagnostic Address Table, 16--6
Batteries, Lithium, 1--27
FANUC Operators Panel Connection Signals, 16--4
Battery Replacement, 1--27
Feed Hold, Push Button, 1--24
Fire, hazard, 2--4
C Force Turret CW and CCW, 9--2
Cable Slings, 1--12 Fumes, 2--4
Calibration, 11--9 Function Description of M Codes, 7--2
Manual Calibration -- Macro O9011, 11--9
Carrying & Lifting Safety, 1--3
Centrifugal Force & Speed Limits for Chucks, 3--20
G
Chain, Lifting, 1--10 G codes, 6--1

Chuck GE FANUC 21i--TA CNC System, 3--1


Centrifugal Force Limits, 3--20 General
Lubrication, 3--20 Chuck Safety, 3--19
Safety, 3--19 Lifting, 1--7
Speed Limits, 3--20 Safety Instructions, 1--2
Top Jaw Recommendations, 3--21 Guard, strength, 2--2
Types, 3--20
Guarding, Perimeter, 1--23
chuck
operation, 1--25
safety, 1--25
H
Chuck Drawbar Force Control, 3--15
Hardware Axis Overtravel, 5--1
Chucks, 3--20
Hoist Ring, 1--9
Control, 2--5
Hooks
Controls, 3--1 P Type, 1--14
Conveyor, 3--17 S Type, 1--14
Conveyor, Controls, 3--17 U Type, 1--16
Coolant, misting, 2--4 HPA -- Manual Toolsetting Arm, 11--4

Cincinnati Machine 91203597A001 i


Index

Maintenance Safety, 1--5


I
Manual Calibration -- Macro O9011, 11--9
Input/Output Device and Code Number, 15--2
Manual Tool Setting, 11--2
Input/Output Devices, 15--1
Manual Tool Setting -- Macro O9011, 11--11
Install, Relocate Safety, 1--4
Material
Interlock, Operator Sliding Door, 1--23 Safety Data Sheet, 1--6
Isolation Device, Electrical, 1--24 Used with this Product, 1--6
Metric Lifting Points, Lifting Points -- Metric, 1--24
MSDS Material Safety Data Sheet, 1--6
L MTB Operators control panel, 3--11
Lifting
Beam & Spreader Bars, 1--10
Devices, 1--7 N
Information Safety, 1--17
Safety, 1--3 Noise, 2--3
Limits Chucks, 3--20 Nylon Slings, 1--13

Lithium Batteries, 1--27


Lubrication, Chucks, 3--20 O
Operating Devices, Optional, 3--17
M Operation, Setup Safety, 1--4
Operator, Sliding Door, 1--23
M Codes, Function Description, 7--2
Operator Messages, 16--73
M codes , 7--1
Operator panel, Pushbutton decriptions, 3--2
M44 TSA Up, 11--3
Optional Operating Devices, 3--17
M45 TSA Down, 11--3
Machine
Alignments & Program Points, 2--27
information, 2--1, 2--5
P
location, 2--4 P Type Hooks, 1--14
Zero, 2--27
Parts Catcher, 12--1
machine, orientation, 2--6 M34 Parts Catcher Advance, 12--1
Machine Alignment & Program Points, 2--27 M35 Parts Catcher Retract, 12--1
Operator and Programming Notes, 12--2
Machine Pressure -- Tailstock Thrust -- Chuck Draw-
bar Force Control, 3--15 Perimeter, Guarding, 1--23
Machine Start Up and Alignment Procedure, 4--1 Personal Safety, 1--2
Machine/Control Alignment Procedure, 4--2 PMC Input Address Reference List, 16--2
Macro Parameters, 11--6 PMC Output Address Reference List, 16--3

Macro Probing Routines, 11--2 Precautions Safety, 1--1


M44 TSA Down, 11--3 Preferred Metric Lifting Eyebolts, 1--8
M44 TSA Up, 11--3
Printed circuit boards, handling, 1--22
Manual Tool Setting, 11--2
Operator and Programming Notes, 11--3 Program, Points, 2--27
Tool Setting Arm Activation, 11--3 Pushbutton descriptions
Macro Routines, 14--1 Automatic operation--programme source, 3--3
Axis/direction selection, 3--7
Macro Variables, 14--1 Coolant buttons, 3--9
Main Power Disconnect Switch, 3--16 Execution pushbuttons, 3--3

ii Cincinnati Machine 91203597A001


Index

Miscellaneous controls, 3--10 Specification, 2--7


Operation buttons, 3--5 Spindle Functions, 8--1
Operation select, 3--6
Operator panel, 3--2 Spindle Jog, 8--2
Spindle control buttons, 3--4 Spindle Load Meter, 3--11
Spreader Bars & Lifting Beams, 1--10
Start Up and Alignment Procedure, 4--1
R Start Up and Shut Down Procedures, 4--1
Range, drawings, 2--9 Stylus Alignment, 11--5
Adjusting the Software Back Off Distance, 11--6
Relocation & Installation Safety, 1--4 Control Options, 11--5
Ring Hoist, 1--9 Standard Calibration Data -- Base Number 522,
11--5
Rope Wire, 1--12
Stylus Position, 11--5
Swarf Conveyor, Controls, 3--17
S System, information, 2--1

S Hooks, 1--14
Safety T
Cable Slings, 1--12 T Word, 9--2
Chain, 1--10
Tailstock Thrust -- Chuck Drawbar Force Control,
Chuck Guidelines, 3--19
3--15
Features, 1--23
General Instructions & Considerations, 1--2 Tool, Safety, 1--3
Hoist Ring, 1--9 Tool Life Management, 9--2
Installation & Relocation, 1--4 Tool Nose Vector Hh, 11--8
Lifting & Carrying, 1--3
Lifting Information, 1--17 Tool Setting Arm Activation, 11--3
Maintenance, 1--5 Tool Turret, 9--1
Material Safety Data Sheet, 1--6 Tooling Functions, 9--1
Nylon Slings, 1--13
P Type Hooks, 1--14 Toolsetter, 11--1
Personal, 1--2 Top Jaw Chuck, 3--21
Precautions, 1--1 TSA/HPA Calibration, 11--4
S Hooks, 1--14
Turret Alignment, 4--2
Setup & Operation, 1--4
Spreader Bars & Lifting Beams, 1--10 Turret Indexes, 9--1
Tool, 1--3
U Hooks, 1--16
Wire Rope, 1--12 U
Work Area, 1--2 U Type Hooks, 1--16
safety, chuck, 1--25
Safety And Usage Notes, 1--25
W
Setup, Operation Safety, 1--4
Wash Gun, 3--18
Sling Load Angle Chart, 1--13
Wire Rope, 1--12
Slings Work Area Safety, 1--2
Cable, 1--12
Nylon, 1--13 workholding device, 1--25
Software and Hardware Axis Overtravel, 5--1
Software Axis Overtravel, 5--1 Z
Software range, Cancel checking, 5--1 Z Axis, Machine Zero, 2--27

Cincinnati Machine 91203597A001 iii


Index

Zero, Machine, 2--27

iv Cincinnati Machine 91203597A001

You might also like